Bas Svx31u en - 04222021

Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
Tracer® SC System Controller

Model Number: BMSC000AAA011000
This material is the proprietary property of Trane and has been provided
for educational use. Further distribution of this material is prohibited.
SAFETY WARNING
Only qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning
equipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training. Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person
could result in death or serious injury. When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels that
are attached to the equipment.
April 2021 BAS-SVX31U-EN

Introduction
Read this manual thoroughly before operating or servicing this unit.
Warnings, Cautions, and Notices

Safety advisories appear throughout this manual as required. Your personal safety and the
proper operation of this machine depend upon the strict observance of these precautions.
The three types of advisories are defined as follows:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

WARNING death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

CAUTION minor or moderate injury. It could also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property-damage only

NOTICE accidents.
Important Environmental Concerns

Scientific research has shown that certain man-made chemicals can affect the earth’s naturally
occurring stratospheric ozone layer when released to the atmosphere. In particular, several of the
identified chemicals that may affect the ozone layer are refrigerants that contain Chlorine,
Fluorine and Carbon (CFCs) and those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon
(HCFCs). Not all refrigerants containing these compounds have the same potential impact to the
environment. Trane advocates the responsible handling of all refrigerants-including industry
replacements for CFCs and HCFCs such as saturated or unsaturated HFCs and HCFCs.
Important Responsible Refrigerant Practices

Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are important to the environment, our
customers, and the air conditioning industry. All technicians who handle refrigerants must be
certified according to local rules. For the USA, the Federal Clean Air Act (Section 608) sets forth
the requirements for handling, reclaiming, recovering and recycling of certain refrigerants and
the equipment that is used in these service procedures. In addition, some states or municipalities
may have additional requirements that must also be adhered to for responsible management of
refrigerants. Know the applicable laws and follow them.
WARNING
Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required!
Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury.
All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and
grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards,
you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in
NEC and your local/state/national electrical codes.
©2021 Trane BAS-SVX31U-EN

Introduction
WARNING
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required!
Failure to wear proper PPE for the job being undertaken could result in death or serious
injury.
Technicians, in order to protect themselves from potential electrical, mechanical, and
chemical hazards, MUST follow precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and
labels, as well as the instructions below:
• Before installing/servicing this unit, technicians M UST put on all PPE required for
the work being undertaken (Examples; cut resistant gloves/sleeves, butyl gloves,
safety glasses, hard hat/bump cap, fall protection, electrical PPE and arc flash
clothing). ALWAYS refer to appropriate Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and OSHA
guidelines for proper PPE.
• When working with or around hazardous chemicals, ALWAYS refer to the
appropriate SDS and OSHA/GHS (Global Harmonized System of Classification and
Labelling of Chemicals) guidelines for information on allowable personal exposure
levels, proper respiratory protection and handling instructions.
• If there is a risk of energized electrical contact, arc, or flash, technicians MUST put
on all PPE in accordance with OSHA, NFPA 70E, or other country-specific
requirements for arc flash protection, PRIOR to servicing the unit. NEVER PERFORM
ANY SWITCHING, DISCONNECTING, OR VOLTAGE TESTING WITHOUT PROPER
ELECTRICAL PPE AND ARC FLASH CLOTHING. ENSURE ELECTRICAL METERS AND
EQUIPMENT ARE PROPERLY RATED FOR INTENDED VOLTAGE.
WARNING
Follow EHS Policies!
Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury.
• All Trane personnel must follow the company’s Environmental, Health and Safety
(EHS) policies when performing work such as hot work, electrical, fall protection,
lockout/tagout, refrigerant handling, etc. Where local regulations are more
stringent than these policies, those regulations supersede these policies.
• Non-Trane personnel should always follow local regulations.
Copyright
This document and the information in it are the property of Trane, and may not be used or
reproduced in whole or in part without written permission. Trane reserves the right to revise this
publication at any time, and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any
person of such revision or change.
Trademarks
All trademarks referenced in this document are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Factory Training
Factory training is available through Trane University™ to help you learn more about the
operation and maintenance of your equipment. To learn about available training opportunities
contact Trane University™.
Online: www.trane.com/traneuniversity
Phone: 855-803-3563
Email: [email protected]
BAS-SVX31U-EN 3
Introduction
Revision History
Minor updates to document.
4 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table of Contents
Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tracer SC Model Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tracer SC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tracer SC Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Tracer SC Service Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Licensing and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to Obtain a Tracer SC for Offsite Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Tracer SC Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Software and Service Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Supported Web Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Making a Direct Connection Between a PC and a Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting Your PC to a Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting the IP Address on Your PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Setting the Internet Proxy Server Address on your PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Configuring a New Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Setting Rotary Addresses on the Tracer SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Device ID Assignment for BACnet MS/TP Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Device ID Assignment for BACnet IP Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Device ID Assignment for Base Tracer SCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Device ID Assignment for Wireless Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Customizing BACnet Device IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Logging into Tracer SC for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tracer SC Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Installation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Configuring Basic Settings for the Tracer SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Configuring Facility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Defining the Network/Defining Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Network Connectivity and the SSL Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Setting Up Intelligent Services (IS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Configuring the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Modifying Intelligent Services and TraneConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Troubleshooting Intelligent Services (IS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Applying Table Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
The Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
BAS-SVX31U-EN 5
Table of Contents
Using the Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Drag a Tracer SC Component onto the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Drag a Tree Component onto the Home Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Drag a Tree Component onto the Home Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Drag Tree Nodes to Other Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rename Tree Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Add a Custom Graphics Node to the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Edit a Node on the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Add a Custom Folder to the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Delete a Node from the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Undo a Change to the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Redo a Previously Undone Change to the Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Reset the Tree to Standard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
User Accounts and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Best Practices for User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Creating a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Creating a New Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
User Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Remote Access to a Tracer BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Alarm Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Notification Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Routing Alarm E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Enabling Audible Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Alarm Message Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Alarm Setup in Point Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Configuring System-defined Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Configuring User-defined Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Analog Point Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Binary Point Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Multistate Point Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using the Trend Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Creating a Scheduled Data Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Creating a Triggered Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Spaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Area Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table of Contents
Variable Air Systems (VAS) Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Chiller Plant Control (CPC) Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Points Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
User-defined Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Viewing a User-defined Point Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating a User-defined Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
System-defined Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Point Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Performing Simple Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Performing Advanced Overrides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Point Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Placing Points In or Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Space Temperature Setpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Determining the Space Temperature Setpoint Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Changing the Temperature Setpoint Control for VAV Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Optimal Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Exceptions and Calendars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Creating a New Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Exporting a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
The Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Backup and Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Custom Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Setting Up User Access for Custom Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Global Referencers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Custom Equipment Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Key Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Equipment Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tracer Ensemble IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Resource Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
BACnet Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Connecting a Tracer SC to a Building Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Network Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
BAS-SVX31U-EN 7
Table of Contents
Single and Multiple Tracer SC Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Networks with Multiple Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Network Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Obtaining the IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Ethernet Network Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Network Wiring Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fiber-Optic Cable Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fiber-Optic Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fiber-Optic Media Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
BACnet Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

BBMDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
BDTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
UDP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Multi-Tracer SC Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting Up BACnet Communication for Multiple Tracer SCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sharing Data Between Two Tracer SCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sharing Data Using the Pull Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sharing Data Using the Push Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Unit controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
BACnet MS/TP Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
BACnet IP Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Air-Fi Wireless Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
LonTalk Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Trane Legacy Unit Controllers (Comm3/4) Supported by Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Non-Trane Unit controllers Support by Tracer SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Quantity of Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
The BACnet Unit Controller Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Installing Factory-Programmed BACnet Unit Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Installing Field-Programmable BACnet Unit Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Adding BACnet Unit Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Replacing BACnet Unit Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
The LonTalk Unit Controller Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Installing Factory-Programmed LonTalk Unit Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Installing Field-Programmable LonTalk Unit Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Retrofitting a LonTalk Link: Tracer Summit to a Tracer SC System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Replacing LonTalk Unit Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table of Contents
Adding LonTalk Unit Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

The Modbus Unit Controller Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Wire and Network Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Modbus Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Replacing Modbus Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Discovering and Installing SC-App and SC-Base Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Discovering BACnet Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Installing Factory-Programmed BACnet Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Installing Field-Programmable BACnet Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Discovering LonTalk Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Installing Factory-Programmed LonTalk Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Installing Field-Programmable LonTalk Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Discovering Legacy Comm3/4 Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Installing Factory-Programmed Legacy Comm3/4 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Installing Field-Programmable Legacy Comm3/4 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Discovering Modbus RTU Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Discovering Modbus TCP Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Creating a Virtual Equipment Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Editing Multi-equipment Device Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Editing Existing Virtual Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adding New Virtual Equipment to an Existing Multi-equipment
Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Creating an Equipment Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Editing an Equipment Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Editing an Equipment Template When adding Additional Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Deleting an Equipment Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Applying an Existing Template to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Exporting and Importing Equipment Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Replacing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Refreshing Equipment (Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Changing the Display Name of an Installed Device (Equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Deleting a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
LEDs and the 7–Segment Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Powering Up/Powering Down the Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
The LEDs and the 7–Segment Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Interpreting the LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
BAS-SVX31U-EN 9
Table of Contents
Interpreting the 7–Segment Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Troubleshooting with LEDs and the 7-Segment Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Force Return to Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Troubleshooting Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
PING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
IPCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Building Network Installation Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Setting Up Trane Connect Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Registering a Tracer BAS Controller or Tracer Concierge with TIS Command
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Modifying a Previously Registered Tracer BAS Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Customer Admin Initial Account Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Logging in to Trane Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Creating Additional Trane Connect Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Configuring Tracer SC for Tracer Summit BCU Data Collection and Remote
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Tracer SC LonTalk UNVT and SVNT Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
LonTalk UNVT Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
UNVT Mapping Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
SNVT Types Supported by Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Key Mapping and Enumerations for Unit Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tracer UC400 Unit Controller Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tracer MP501 Unit Controller Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tracer MP503 Unit Controller Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tracer SC Enumerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configuring TCP/IP and BACnet Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tracer SC-App and Tracer SC-Base Reside on the Same Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Configure the Tracer SC-App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Configure the Tracer SC-Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tracer SC-App and Tracer SC-Base Reside on Separate Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Configure the Tracer SC-App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Configure the Tracer SC-Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
10 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table of Contents
Setting Up the BDT Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Networking and IT Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
HTTP and HTTPS Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Active Directory Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Domain Name Services (DNS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Network Bandwith Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
IP Addressing and Network Address Translation (NAT) Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Network Connectivity and SSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Client Access and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Network Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Firewalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
VPN Client Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
VPN LAN to LAN Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Cellular Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Air-Fi® Wireless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Physical Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Special Considerations: Anti-virus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
BAS-SVX31U-EN 11
Product Overview
The Tracer® SC system controller (Tracer SC) serves as the central coordinator for all individual
equipment devices on a Tracer building automation system. The Web-based interface of the
Tracer SC system controller provides an easy and convenient way for building operators to
access their building automation system. Access is available from any personal computer or
mobile device, including remote locations.
Tracer SC Model Numbers

Model number Description
BMSC000AAA011000 (current) Tracer SC with power supply module (PM014) with U.S. outlet, enclosure ordered separately
BMSC000AAA011100 (obsolete) Tracer SC system controller with power supply module (PM214) with U.S. outlet, in enclosure
BMSC000AAA011200 (obsolete) Tracer SC system controller with power supply module (PM214), in enclosure
Tracer SC Components
The Tracer SC system controller is equipped with the components shown in the following figure.
The table that follows provides descriptions.
Figure 1. Tracer SC Components
12 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Product Overview
Callout Number in
Figure Tracer SC Components Description
1 LonTalk LINK
2 BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU LINK 1
3 BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU LINK 2
4, 22 IMC Connections
5 Status LED
6 Ethernet LEDs
7 USB service tool port
8 USB host (future)
Ethernet network connection 2 (supports TCP/IP, recommended for direct connection to

9
PC)
Ethernet network connection 1 (supports Modbus TCP, BACnet and TCP/TP; recommended
10
for building network connections)
11 EIA-232 serial connection
12 IMC LEDs
13 EIA-232 LEDs
14 SD card port (future)
15 Rotary switches
16 7-segment display
17 LonTalk service pin
18 LonTalk service LED
19 Power button
20 LonTalk LEDs
21 BACnet LEDs
Tracer SC Accessories
Description Order number
BACnet terminator 2 pack (a) X1365152401
Rover LonTalk interface adaptor(b) S3090062062

(a) For information about this accessory, see BACnet MS/TP Wiring Best Practices (BAS-SVX051).
(b) For more information about this accessory, see Rover Service Tool Installation, Operation, and Programming (EMTX-
SVX01).
Tracer SC Service Parts

Service parts for the Tracer® SC system controller are shown in the following figure. The
following tables provide descriptions.
N o t e : Some of the service parts are the same for all models.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 13
Product Overview
Figure 2. Tracer SC service parts

1
4
2
3
5
2 4 3
6
Table 1. Tracer SC model BMSC000AAA011000 (current)

Callout Number in
Figure Description Order number
1 Enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers (120 VAC, with outlet) X13651559010
2 Tracer SC module S3090058462
3 Power supply module X1365153801
(not shown) Enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers (230 VAC, no outlet) X13651560010
(not shown) Transformer service part S3090062462
4 IMC power cable S3090059562
Large enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers, 120 VAC, with outlet

(not shown) X13651552-01
(solid door)

(not shown) X13651553-01
(display-capable door)
14 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Product Overview
Table 1. Tracer SC model BMSC000AAA011000 (current) (continued)

Callout Number in

(not shown) X13651554-01
(display-capable door)
Large enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers, 230

(not shown) X13651555-01
VAC, with outlet (display-capable door)
Table 2. Tracer SC models BMSC000AAA011100 and BMSC000AAA011200 (obsolete)

Callout Number in
2 Tracer SC module S3090058462
3 Power supply module S3090058562
4 IMC power cable S3090059562
5 Cable assembly/modular terminal kit with U.S. outlet S3090059062
(not shown) Cable assembly/modular terminal kit S3090059162
6 Control panel cover (for models with U.S. outlet) S3090058962
(not shown) Control panel cover S3090058862
7 Enclosure S3090058762
Licensing and Hardware

The number of devices that are supported is limited by the number within the application license.
The maximum amount is 240 devices in a single license. As of Tracer® SC version 3.0, all Tracer
SCs ship with a base license installed. The order number for an SC Application license is
BMCF000AAA0AE00 (15 devices).
To utilize the expanded communications functionality for multi-SC facilities, the following are
required:
• One Tracer SC with an Application license
• One or more Tracer SCs with a Base license.
License Type TIS Ready Multi SC Ready BAS App
Application V4.0 + Up to 240 devices Yes Up to 240 devices
Base V4.0 + Up to 240 devices Yes N/A
Base V3.0 — V3.9 Up to 5 devices Yes N/A
How to Obtain a Tracer SC for Offsite Programming

With Tracer® SC V4.2+ and Tracer TU V9.0+, offsite programming is supported. One or more
physical Tracer SCs (with an appropriate software license) are required to support this
functionality. Refer to the Offsite Facility Definition Programming Guide, BAS-SVP025, for more
information. It is recommended that you utilize one of the following options:
• The Tracer SC(s) ordered for each job – with appropriate planning, the Tracer SC(s) for a
specific job can be utilized.
• Existing licensed Tracer SCs – if you already have one or more Tracer SCs that have been
used in your office in the past, they can be utilized to support this functionality.
• Tracer SCs that have been ordered with a new Demo license – a new demo license has been
created to support this functionality. The Demo license can be ordered through the Job
BAS-SVX31U-EN 15
Product Overview
Center (part # BMCF000AAA0DA00). The Tracer SC demo license provides support for up to
240 devices and provides licensing for all Tracer SC features.
N o t e : You must have a software license with the appropriate device count to support your
application.
N o t e : The Tracer SC demo license is time-limited and the Tracer SC will power itself down after
five days. A Tracer SC that has a demo license installed will display a banner which reads
“Demo” on the login page. It will provide information on the time remaining prior to
power down, on the bottom of all pages.
Setup Requirements
The following are required for setup and normal operation.
Scenario 1: Single Tracer® SC Facility
• Tracer SC must have an application license in order to install equipment and facilitate control.
• Ethernet port 1 must be used for communication over BACnet IP.
• BACnet MS/TP port network number cannot exceed 4193.
Scenario 2: Multi-Tracer SC Facility
• One Tracer SC must have an application license in order to install equipment and facilitate
control.
• Additional Tracer SCs do not require a license.
• Ethernet port 1 must be used for communication between multiple SCs over BACnet IP.
• Tracer SC Device IDs must be unique.
• BACnet MS/TP port network number cannot exceed 4193.
• Tracer SCs on separate subnets must have one BBMD per subnet.
• UDP ports must be the same across all SCs in the facility.
N o t e : Both the Tracer SC-App and the Tracer SC-Base must be configured to communicate to
each other over BACnet IP. They can reside on the same network subnet or on a
separate subnet.
Scenario 3: TraneConnect and Intelligent Services
• No additional license required.
• TraneConnect and Intelligent Services are enabled in Tracer SC by default. To opt out, edit the
settings under the Intelligent Services tab on the Identification and Communications page.
• Configure Tracer SC Ethernet port 1 or 2 to communicate to the Internet.
For more information about Intelligent Services, see “TIS Technical Specifications”,
SRV-PRC011.
Tracer SC Facilities
A Tracer SC facility is defined as one Application SC and one or more associated Base SCs. A
single building or site can contain more than one facility. See the following figure for an example
of a Tracer SC facility configuration. The following attributes apply to Tracer SC facilities:
• Tracer SC facility is limited to one Application SC.
• Tracer SC facility has one or more Base SCs.
• Tracer SC facility can support a maximum 240 devices.
• Tracer SC facility may be limited to 120 devices depending on the communications involved
(see the following table for device capability).
16 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Product Overview
Table 3. Device capability
Communication Type Single SC Multi SC
Air-Fi® Wireless Up to 120 devices Up to 240 devices
BACnet MS/TP Up to 120 devices Up to 240 devices
BACnet IP Up to 240 devices Up to 240 devices
COMM 3/4 Up to 240 devices Up to 240 devices
LON Up to 120 devices N/A
Modbus TCP Up to 240 devices N/A
Modbus RTU Up to 60 devices N/A
N o t e : Trane Air-Fi® sensor do not count against the device limits listed above. For more
information, see the Air-Fi Wireless System IOM Manual, (BAS-SVX40).
BAS-SVX31U-EN 17
Software and Service Tools
Specific software and service tools are required for your PC or mobile device, in order to perform
all of the functions available with the Tracer® SC.
Supported Web Browsers

Microsoft® Windows 7:
• Mozilla FireFox (most recent version)
• Internet Explorer 11
• Google Chrome (most recent version)
Microsoft® Windows 8.1: (no support)
Microsoft® Windows 10:
• Internet Explore (no support)
• Microsoft Edge™ (latest version)
Apple® Mac OS (Latest –1)
• Safari (most recent version)
Mobile Devices:
• iOS (Latest –1)
– Safari (latest version)
• Android 4.4+
– Google Chrome (Latest version)
• Microsoft® Windows 10
– Microsoft Edge™ (latest version)
– Google Chrome (Latest version)
– Mozilla FireFox (most recent version)
Service Tools
Two service tools are required for the support of unit controllers and for additional functions on
systems using Tracer SC:
The Tracer® TU Service Tool
• For configuring BACnet unit controllers
• For downloading Tracer SC software updates
• For creating TGP2 programs in Tracer SC.
• For creating, editing, and publishing graphics to the Tracer SC with Tracer Graphics Editor.
• As an additional way to backup and restore data to Tracer SC.
The Rover™ Service Tool
• For configuring LonTalk unit controllers.
• For configuring a LonTalk network using the Rover service tool in active mode (Tracer SC is
not a network manager).
• For creating TGP programs for the Tracer MP580/581 programmable controller.
18 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Software and Service Tools
New in V7.2 is the ability for Rover to remotely connect to a Tracer SC to configure the
downstream LonTalk unit controllers. Active mode is not available during this method of
connection, hence custom bindings cannot be made.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 19
Making a Direct Connection Between a PC and a Tracer
SC
This section explains how to access a Tracer® SC user interface from your PC through a direct
connection. Trane recommends that you make a direct connection from your PC to your Tracer
SC:
• To set up your PC for browsing to the Tracer SC user interface before connecting the Tracer
SC to a building network.
• Anytime you want to service a Tracer system and do not have access to the customer
network.
Connecting Your PC to a Tracer SC

N o t e : Ensure that the Tracer TU service tool is installed on your PC before connecting to a Tracer
SC.
1. Press the power button the Tracer SC.
All LEDs illuminate and the following sequence flashes on the 7–segment display: 8, 7 ,9, 5, 4,
L, dancing dash pattern. The dancing dashes persist while the Tracer SC is operating
normally.
2. Connect either of the following (see the following figure).
a. An Ethernet straight-through or crossover cable from the Ethernet port on your PC to
Ethernet port 2 on the Tracer SC. (Continue with procedures for Setting the IP Address on
your PC and Setting the Internet Proxy Server Address on your PC.
b. A USB 2.0 A to B cable from a USB port on your PC to the USB service tool port on the
Tracer SC. (Continue with the procedure for Setting the Internet Proxy Server Address on
your PC).
I m p o r t a n t : Do not make multiple connections to Tracer SC using the USB cable. For
example, avoid a simultaneous connection to the Tracer SC user interface and
Tracer TU. Disconnect the cable between devices to enable the USB Driver to
recognize the next software device’s request.
Figure 3. Direct connection between PC and a Tracer SC (prior to LAN connection)
a. b.
USB service
IP address for tool port
Ethernet port 2
192.168.2.10
IP address for USB
127.0.0.1: 44789
Ethernet port 2
Ethernet port
Recommended USB port

IP address for PC
192.168.2.100
Setting the IP Address on Your PC

Follow this procedure if you are using an Ethernet connection. It describes how to set the Internet
Protocol (IP) address on a PC that uses a Microsoft Windows 7 operating system. You may need
to modify the process if you are using another compatible operating system.
20 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Making a Direct Connection Between a PC and a Tracer SC
N o t e : If multiple Tracer® SCs are to be on the same network, each one must have a unique IP
address.
To see the IP address on your PC:
1. From the Start menu, Type in Network Connections, then click the View Network Connections
link.
2. Right-click the appropriate network name for your PC and then click properties.
The L o c a l A r e a C o n n e c t i o n P r o p e r t i e s dialog box appears.
3. Click the Networking tab. Click either Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) or Internet
Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6), and then click Properties.
4. Click the P r o p e r t i e s button.
The I n t e r n e t P r o t o c o l ( T C P / I P ) P r o p e r t i e s dialog box appears.
5. Click U s e t h e f o l l o w i n g I P a d d r e s s . Enter the following:
IP address (if connecting to Ethernet Port 2): 192.168.2.100
N o t e : This is the recommended address for the PC. Ethernet Port 2 on the Tracer SC has a
factory address of 192.168.2.10. As long as both PC and Tracer SC addresses have the
same subnet, 192.168.2, any number between 1 and 254 can be used for the last
segment of the address.
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: Leave blank.
6. Click O K .
Setting the Internet Proxy Server Address on your PC

A proxy server provides a way for a PC to access a Tracer® SC through a Web browser. Follow
this procedure if you are using either an Ethernet connection or a USB connection. If you are
using Internet Explorer, set the proxy server address on your PC as follows.
If you are using Mozilla Firefox, contact Trane Product Support for the procedure. The same
settings apply.
1. From the Tools menu of Internet Explorer, select I n t e r n e t o p t i o n s . The I n t e r n e t O p t i o n s
window appears.
2. Click the C o n n e c t i o n s tab.
3. Click the L A N S e t t i n g s button. The Local Area Network (LAN) Settings window appears.
4. In the Proxy frame, select the proxy option, then click the Advanced.
The P r o x y S e t t i n g s dialog box appears.
5. In the HTTP field, enter the following settings.
N o t e s : Separate them from the existing setting, and from one another, with semicolons (;).
• 192.168.1.* (for use of Ethernet port 1)
• 192.168.2.* (for use of Ethernet port 2)
• 127.0.0.1 (for use of USB)
6. Click O K .
You are now ready to log into your Tracer SC.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 21
Configuring a New Tracer SC
This section describes how to configure basic settings on a new Tracer® SC. These procedures
can be performed prior to connecting the Tracer SC to the building network.
N o t e : This section is intended for installer/programmers. If your job role is that of a building
operator, proceed to “The User Interface,” p. 34.
Setting Rotary Addresses on the Tracer SC

The Tracer® SC has a set of three rotary switches on the front of the device, which are used to set
the BACnet Device ID. The rotary switch range is 1 to 419. Zero (0) cannot be used because it is
the default value assigned to the device at the factory.
N o t e : If you set the rotary switch values to a number between 001 and 419, the Tracer SC device
ID and the BACnet MS/TP numbers will be calculated from that number.
To set the rotary switch values, use a small screwdriver to turn the three rotary switches on the
Tracer SC to a unique number between 001 and 999.
Device ID Assignment for BACnet MS/TP Devices

Each unit controller must have a unique BACnet device ID. Tracer® SC automates the process by
calculating a unique device ID for each unit controller and then saving the device ID to memory in
each device.
BACnet MS/TP device IDs are calculated using the following three sets of values:
• The Tracer SC rotary switch value (1 to 419)
• The Tracer SC BACnet MS/TP link number (1 to 2)
• The unit controller rotary switch value (1 to 127)
The three values are joined together to form the BACnet device ID for the unit controller as
shown in the following table.
Tracer SC rotary switch value (21) 0 2 1
Tracer SC BACnet MS/TP link number (1) 1
Unit controller rotary switch value (38) 0 3 8
BACnet Device ID: 211038 0 2 1 1 0 3 8
Device ID Assignment for BACnet IP Devices

Each unit controller must have a unique BACnet device ID. Tracer SC/SC+ automates the device
ID assignment process for Trane unit controllers by calculating a unique device ID for each unit
controller and then saving the device ID to memory in each device.
For devices communicating over BACnet IP, Tracer SC/SC+ calculates the device ID using the
BACnet network number defined for Ethernet port 1 and the unit controller rotary switch value.
The Tracer SC/SC+ rotary switch value is not used in the device ID calculation for IP devices.
BACnet IP device IDs are calculated using the following two sets of values:
• The BACnet network number for Ethernet 1. (This number can be changed by the user).
– Tracer SC defaults the BACnet IP network number as 1, and under most circumstances it
is not changed.
• The unit controller rotary switch value (1 to 999). The Tracer SC/SC+ rotary address is not
used to calculate BACnet IP device IDs.
The following table shows this process using a Tracer UC600 unit controller.
22 BAS-SVX31U-EN
BACnet network number Eth port 1 (1) 1
BACnet IP Device ID: 01042 0 1 0 4 2
Device ID Assignment for Base Tracer SCs

For unit controllers installed using a Base Tracer® SC, the Application Tracer SC calculates the
device ID using the BACnet network number of the Base Tracer SC MS/TP link and the rotary
switch value of the unit controller.
The example in the following table illustrates this process.
Table 4. Calculating the base Tracer SC device ID
BACnet network number of Base SC MS/TP link 1 (22) 2 2
Unit controller device ID set by Application SC: 22001 2 2 0 0 1
Device ID Assignment for Wireless Devices

For devices connecting over a wireless network, Tracer SC calculates the device ID using the
BACnet network number and the rotary switch value of the wireless device.
The example in the following table illustrates this process.
BACnet network number of Tracer SC wireless network (13) 1 3
Wireless unit controller rotary switch value (001) 0 0 1
Wireless unit controller Device ID set by the Tracer SC

(app): 13001 1 3 0 0 1
Customizing BACnet Device IDs

For complex BACnet addressing schemes or prescribed job specifications, custom device IDs
may be required. You can customize the device IDs of Tracer unit controllers by using the Tracer
TU service tool. During the device installation process in Tracer® SC, select the "Preserve the
predefined BACnet device ID of the unit controllers being installed" checkbox (see the following
figure). As a result, the installed devices will retain their device IDs. This feature applies to Trane
and non-Trane BACnet devices.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 23
Figure 4. Customize device IDs (device discovery page)
Logging into Tracer SC for the First Time

Before logging into Tracer for the first time, setup your personal computer (PC) as described in
“Making a Direct Connection Between Your PC and a Tracer SC,” p. 20.
Initial Login
1. Log into Tracer® SC by either:
• Launching the Web Browser on your PC and navigating to the Tracer SC by entering its IP
address in the Web browser address field.
– 192.168.1.10 (if using Ethernet port 1)
– 192.168.2.10 (if using Ethernet port 2)
– 127.0.0.1: 44789 (if using USB)
• Or, if your Tracer SC is connected by USB, selecting theT
Tr a c e r S C V i a U S B desktop icon
that appeared on your PC desktop screen when you installed Tracer TU.
The Tracer SC Login screen will appear. (For future use and easy retrieval, bookmark the IP
address.)
2. At the Tracer SC Login page, enter the user ID and password (case-sensitive):
• User ID: Trane
• Password: Tracer
3. Click l o g i n . The End User License Agreement appears.
4. Accept the agreement and click c o n t i n u e . The C h a n g e P a s s w o r d page appears.
5. Enter the old password and the new password, and then confirm the password. Click C h a n g e
P a s s w o r d . The T r a c e r S C I n i t i a l S e t u p page appears.
I m p o r t a n t : As of version 4.3, The following words are prohibited from use as part of the user
password: Trane, Tracer, Admin, Password. Passwords must also now contain at
least one number and one special character.
Tracer SC Initial Setup

The T r a c e r S C I n i t i a l S e t u p page is designed as a quick start for basic configuration. The page
automatically launches after logging on to a Tracer® SC for the first time.
24 BAS-SVX31U-EN
I m p o r t a n t : This page will not appear again. You can use the Installation page to change any of
the settings, except for system units, at any time after the initial log in is completed.
The following items are configurable from the T r a c e r S C I n i t i a l S e t u p page:
Date and Time
• The date and time from your PC are used for the Tracer SC.
• You can manually change the date and time.
• The time zone setting configures the appropriate daylight savings time.
BACnet Identification
• Enter a unique name for the Tracer SC in the BACnet device field.
• The rotary switch settings are used to calculate the device ID for the Tracer SC and the
network numbers for MS/TP Port 1 and MS/TP Ports 1 and 2.
• If the Tracer SC is intended to be a BACnet broadcast management device (BBMD), select the
checkbox that assigns it as a BBMD. For information about BBMDs, see BACnet Network
Communication.“BACnet Network Communication,” p. 97
• If BACnet unit controllers will be supported on the Tracer system, select the baud rate for the
appropriate links. Select 78600 bps for Trane unit controllers.
System Units
• System units are associated with internal Tracer SC data that is communicated to unit
controllers and other Tracer SCs. The system unit choices are the International System of
Units (SI), inch-pound (IP), or a customized mix of the two.
• You are not allowed to change the system units after this page is saved.
Figure 5. system unit selection for Tracer SC+ and unit controllers
Licensing
Tracer SC product licenses enable Tracer SC applications and determine the number of devices
that can be installed onto a Tracer SC system. There are two types of licenses available: the
Tracer SC-Base license and the Tracer SC-Application license.
Tracer SC-Base License
This license is applied to every Tracer SC ordered at the factory. The Base license includes
connectivity for up to 240 devices for TIS and is Multi-SC Ready. This license does not enable any
of the control applications (VAS, Area, CPC, TGP2) that are required to control a building.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 25
Tracer SC-Application License

This license enables the control applications and increases the number of supported devices up
to a maximum of 240. A single application license is created by combining multiple, stackable
application licenses through the BAS registration site. When installed, the application license will
overwrite the base license and will enable the control applications for the number of devices
specified in the Tracer SC application license.
You can obtain licenses from: http://www.basregistration.trane.com/Registration/
ControlsLicensing.htm. You will need either the Tracer SC hardware serial number (see label on
Tracer SC) or the product order number.
To License your Tracer SC:
1. Browse to the license file from www.basregistration.trane.com.
2. Download the file to the Tracer SC. The file upload dialog box appears.
3. Click once on the selected file and then click open to move the file path into the Locate File
field.
4. Click import license file to complete the licensing process.
Saving the Initial Setup Configuration

To save the Tracer SC Initial Setup page configuration:
1. Click s a v e . The Saving Initial Setup confirmation screen appears.
2. Click c o n t i n u e to save the new settings. The Tracer SC will restart.
N o t e : To log in again, you need only your user ID and password.
Force Return to Factory Defaults

In some case, a corrupt database or similar problem may prevent you from accessing the Tracer
SC user interface. If this occurs, do the following to return to factory defaults:
1. Power down the Tracer SC.
2. Reset the rotary switches to “999.”
3. Power up the Tracer SC.
4. The 7-segment display shows F, o, r, C, E.
5. Within 30 seconds, set the rotary switches to the intended normal value.
6. The 7-segment display shows C, L, E, A, r, indicating that the database is being cleared. It will
then resume normal operation showing –L on the 7-segment display during startup and then
“dancing dashes.”
N o t e : If rotary switches are not reset within 30 seconds the Tracer SC will power down, leaving
the database intact.
The Installation Page

Basic settings are configured on the I n s t a l l a t i o n page. The following four subsections in this
manual correspond to the four sections on the I n s t a l l a t i o n page. (See the following figure.)
For help with user interface navigation, see “The User Interface,” p. 34.
26 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Figure 6. Tracer SC Installation page
Configuring Basic Settings for the Tracer SC

These settings are for regional specifications, system units, communications, licensing, and
device discovery. Except for Device Discovery, these settings were configured during initial
configuration. Some of these settings can be edited.
Regional Specifications
This link contains language, time zone, and date and time selections that were made during
initial configuration.
About Date and Time synchronization:
Tracer SC can be synchronized using a network time protocol (NTP) server. You can also select to
synchronized installed BACnet unit controllers. Tracer SC also provides time synchronization for
downstream unit controllers.
Tracer SC can also synchronize the time of all installed downstream devices that support a time
clock. Time synchronization occurs daily at 3:00 a.m. and when the Tracer SC time has been
edited.
Identification and Communication

The Identification and Communications page allows you to view and edit configurations for the
equipment name, location name, BACnet, IP and network address settings, wireless
configuration, Trane Intelligent Services, and network connectivity. It is divided into seven tabs.
Tracer SC System Units

This link enables you to view the system units that were selected for the Tracer SC during initial
installation. They cannot be edited.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 27
Licensing
This link opens the Product License page, which allows you to browse for and install a Tracer SC
license.
Device Discovery
This link opens the Discover Devices page, in which you can discover newly installed unit
controllers.
Configuring Facility Settings

A facility can consist of one or more Tracer SC controllers. These settings are used for a stand-
alone Tracer SC or the Tracer SC-App in a multi-Tracer SC facility.
Location and Contacts

For entering the facility name and contact information for the facility owner and service provider.
Facility Defaults for User Preferences

The Facility Defaults page shows the formats in which the system displays data. This page is
divided into two sections: Regional Preferences and Data Display Units.
Application Defaults
For setting the alarm capacity for each Tracer SC and setpoints to be used by area and variable
air systems. Settings can be changed and updated to all existing areas and variable air systems
using those setpoints.
Priority Levels
Priority levels establish a strategy used by the system to avoid conflicting control by giving
precedence to applications with a higher level of priority. Priority levels are set up in user
administration. They are numbered 1 through 16, with 1 highest and 16 lowest.
SMTP Settings
Use to set up your simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) so that events can be routed to users by
e-mail.
Language Pack
Tracer SC offers the ability to display standard pages, graphics, and built-in help systems in other
languages. Up to four language packs can be uploaded per Tracer SC.
To upload a language pack:
1. To acquire a Tracer SC language pack, log on to the Software Downloads Web Site at https://
tranetechnologies.sharepoint.com/sites/softwaredownloads/SitePages/SC.aspx.
2. From the left navigation menu, click i n s t a l l a t i o n > c o n f i g u r e f a c i l i t y s e t t i n g s > l a n g u a g e
pack.
3. Search for the preferred language pack by using the B r o w s e button.
4. Click u p l o a d l a n g u a g e p a c k . A pop-up dialog box appears confirming a successful upload.
When you click OK, you will be returned to the Login screen.
5. On the Tracer SC Login screen, select the uploaded language button and then enter your User
ID and Password. The Tracer SC user interface will now appear in the newly uploaded
language.
Defining the Network/Defining Facility

The BACnet Broadcast Distribution Table (BDT), which designates BBMDs in the system, is set up
in this section.
N o t e : After a BDT has been set up for the Tracer SC, the Tracer SC can communicate to devices
on other subnet.
28 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Network Connectivity and the SSL Tab

This section covers network security and configurations that will make your customer's Tracer
SC more secure. Although enhancing network security is favorable, in some cases it restricts
user access or increases the number of steps to gain access.
The following configurations are done in the Network Connectivity section (see the following
figure).
Figure 7. Network connectivity and SSL tab
A l l o w c h a n g e s t o n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i v i t y v i a I P n e t w o r k — If selected, users can access the

Network Connectivity and SSL tab over the Internet. If not selected, users must connect locally to
Tracer SC by using a USB cable to view and make changes to the Network Connectivity and SSL
section.
N o t e : When this option is left unchecked (not selected), the Network Connectivity and SSL tab
will not appear on the Tracer SC user interface when connected over TCP/IP. Any changes,
including those made to this option, must be done locally at the Tracer SC user interface
while connected via a USB cable. Selections made for this option affects all users of Tracer
SC.
A l l o w b r o w s e r a n d m o b i l e a c c e s s v i a H T T P ( p o r t 8 0 ) — If selected, users can access Tracer
SC through the HTTP port, versus HTTPS (secured). If unchecked (not selected), users will
encounter a dialog box stating that the connection is untrusted. This is to be expected and users
have the option to add the URL as an exception. As of version 4.3, the port assignment is
editable. Another option is to obtain an SSL certificate (see below).
A l l o w T r a n e D i a g n o s t i c A c c e s s ( p o r t 8 0 2 2 ) — This is a low level services port, which provides
access to Trane Technical Support when Yes is selected. If not selected, access to this port is
denied to all users including Trane Technical Support. As of version 4.3, the port assignment is
editable.
SSL Certificate
An SSL certificate establishes a secure encrypted connection between a browser (user's
computer) and a server (website). This section describes the process required to obtain an SSL
certificate for a customer’s Tracer SC.
To request an SSL certificate:
1. From the Tracer SC user interface, navigate to the network Connectivity and SSL tab. Click the
G e n e r a t e C e r t i f i c a t e S i g n i n g R e q u e s t button, which opens the accompanying dialog box.
2. Enter the requested information in the fields and then click G e n e r a t e . (Consult the
customer’s IT staff to obtain the requested information).
3. You will be prompted to save a file named TracerSC_ssl_csr.pem. This is a Certificate Signing
Request (CSR).
4. Forward the file (CSR) to the customer’s IT staff.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 29
5. When you receive the file back from customer IT, open the Network Connectivity and SSL tab
on the Tracer SC user interface.
6. Click B r o w s e and select the certificate file, then click U p l o a d C e r t i f i c a t e F i l e .
I m p o r t a n t : The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) must be generated by the Tracer SC that
the certificate will be installed on. If the Tracer SC is replaced, a new CSR and
certificate will be required.
To upload a new SSL certificate:

1. In the N e w C e r t i f i c a t e field, click B r o w s e .
2. Select the appropriate file and then click U p l o a d C e r t i f i c a t e F i l e .
Setting Up Intelligent Services (IS)

This section describes how to configure the network settings required to use, view, and modify
the Intelligent Services features of Tracer® SC. Intelligent Services Data Collection facilitates data
collection and distribution to IS servers. This option must be enabled to use Building
Performance, Energy Performance, Active Monitoring, or Alarm Notification IS offerings
(TraneConnect is enabled by default.) Use the TraneConnect option to enable secure remote
access to the Tracer SC. This is necessary in order to connect to the Tracer SC using Tracer TU,
Rover, and the Tracer SC UI from outside of the customer's network.
For detailed instructions on how to configure a Tracer SC as a connectivity module, see
“Configuring Tracer SC for Tracer Summit BCU Data Collection and Remote Connectivity,” p.
155.
Requirements
The minimum required Tracer SC firmware version is V3.0.0564. To obtain a copy of the latest
firmware go to: https://tranetechnologies.sharepoint.com/sites/softwaredownloads/SitePages/
SC.aspx.
Configuring the Network

In order for Intelligent Services to work correctly, DNS must be enabled on your network and a
DNS must be set up.
1. Navigate to the Identification and Communications page. Click “Identification and
Communications” from the C o n f i g u r e B a s i c S e t t i n g s F o r T h i s T r a c e r S C .
2. Click the IP Configuration section to view the settings.
Modifying Intelligent Services and TraneConnect

1. From the Identification and Communications page, select the Intelligent Services tab.
2. Click E d i t .
3. In the I n t e l l i g e n t S e r v i c e s D a t a C o l l e c t i o n f r a m e choose to edit the following:
• I n s t a l l e d D e v i c e s : Enables/disables the collection of data for TIS on devices that are
installed in the Tracer SC.
• B C U ( B M T X / X ) D a t a : Enables/disables the collection of data for TIS on devices that are
installed on the BCU (applicable only on a Base SC). This field is not visible on an
Application SC.
• S t a t u s : Displays the status for installed devices or a BCU or both. This field is displayed
only when any of the installed devices or BCU data is Enabled in the Tracer SC.
4. In the T r a n e C o n n e c t f r a m e choose to edit the following:
• T r a n e C o n n e c t : Allows you to enable/disable TraneConnect for Tracer SC.
• S t a t u s : Displays the status of the TraneConnect. This field is displayed only when
TraneConnect is enabled.
• B A C n e t C o n n e c t i v i t y o v e r T r a n e C o n n e c t f o r T r a c e r S u m m i t : This sets up an
additional BACnet IP datalink bound to the TraneConnect connection. When enabled, the
30 BAS-SVX31U-EN
SC acts as a BACnet router allowing external tools such as Tracer Summit to access
devices on the SC’s BACnet internetwork through TraneConnect. This is not required to
access Tracer SC via TraneConnect. Changing any of these settings will cause the SC to
restart.
• B A C n e t N e t w o r k N u m b e r : This is the network number assigned to the TraneConnect
datalink connection. As with all other links, this MUST be unique across the entire BACnet
internetwork (particularly be aware of remote networks accessed via routers that may
cause a conflict). If in doubt, choose a large number less than 65535.
• U D P P o r t f o r B A C n e t : The UDP port for BACnet IP over TraneConnect datalink. This is the
port that will be used when configuring the connection in Tracer Summit or other external
tools. Since TraneConnect is on a private IP subnet, it is not necessary to change this
from the default of 47808.
5. Click S a v e (see the following figure).
Figure 8. Intelligent Services tab
Troubleshooting Intelligent Services (IS)

Table 5. Test Connection – Response messages
Response Probable Cause Resolution
Connection to Internet is successful. TCP/IP

Connection successful. connectivity to the IS and TraneConnect n/a
server is successful.
Verify network configuration or contact the

Unable to communicate with TraneConnect Internet communication with TraneConnect site’s network administrator to confirm
server. server failed. network is configured to allow Internet
communication to TraneConnect Server.
Verify network configuration or contact site’s

The http settings for the TIS server are
Unable to communicate with Intelligent network administrator to confirm network is
incorrect, server is down, or some network
Services. configured to allow Internet communication
settings are incorrect.
to TraneConnect Server.
Verify network configuration or contact site’s

Unable to communicate with all Intelligent Internet communication with Intelligent network administrator to confirm network is
Services servers. Services and TraneConnect servers failed. configured to allow Internet communication
to TraneConnect Server.
Contact Controls Technical Support and

All other messages. Various causes.
provide them with the exact status message.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 31
Table 6. Status – Possible error messages
Message Probable Cause Resolution
The IS application is communicating

Communicating n/a
normally.
DNS failed. Check that DNS is enabled and Attempts to verify that DNS is enabled and Confirm that DNS has been enabled and
properly configured on the Tracer SC. functioning properly have failed. configured properly on the Tracer SC.
IS has been enabled on Tracer SC but is

Waiting to start communicating with Trane Wait 5 minutes after Tracer SC startup and
waiting to startup in order to allow normal
Intelligent Services. this status will be cleared.
Tracer SC functionality to progress.
• Check the networks to ensure they can

access the Internet.
No Internet Connection Tracer SC cannot connect to the Internet.
• Contact the site’s network administrator
if unable to resolve.
Attempts from multiple IS service apps on the

No connection to Multiple Services. Tracer SC failed to post a message to their Contact Controls Technical Support.
corresponding Intelligent Services endpoint.
Attempt to post a message to the Intelligent

No connection to Inventory Service Contact Controls Technical Support.
Services inventory endpoint has failed.

No connection to Data Collection Service Contact Controls Technical Support.
Services data collection endpoint has failed.

No connection to Alarm Service Contact Controls Technical Support.
Services alarm endpoint has failed.
No connection to Configuration Change Attempt to post a message to the Intelligent

Contact Controls Technical Support.
Service Services config change endpoint has failed.

No connection to Health Status Service Contact Controls Technical Support.
Services health endpoint has failed.
The Tracer SC periodically polls the IS servers

for new configuration. This status shows that
the last attempt has failed. If this status
Connection to the IS config server was
remains after 5 minutes, consider use of data
Unable to download Intelligent Services established successfully but an attempt to
static endpoints since there may be firewall
configuration settings download configuration data from the IS
rules on customer's network restricting
config server has failed.
communication. Contact IS admin to help set
up data static endpoints and resolve this
issue.
Connection with the TraneConnect server was

Unable to download TraneConnect
established successfully but attempt to Contact Controls Technical Support.
configuration settings
download configuration data failed.
TraneConnect Manager attempted to start the

tunnel service on the Tracer SC but no tunnel
interface was found. Either Tracer SC does
Unable to Start TraneConnect Client Contact Controls Technical Support.
not have an open VPN profile or the profile is
invalid and the open VPN client cannot be
started.
Communicating. Waiting for TIS admin to The Tracer SC is not registered with the Contact Controls Technical Support to
configure TraneConnect. TraneConnect server. register the Tracer SC with TraneConnect.
See the “Modifying Intelligent Services and

Disable This feature is disabled.
TraneConnect” procedure to enable.
Contact Controls Technical Support and

All other messages Various causes.
provide them with the exact status message.
32 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 7. Outbound network ports and destination servers
Service Outbound Port Protocol Server DNS
443 TCP
TraneConnect sc-traneconnect.tis.trane.com
1194* see note (A) UDP
Data Connection 443 TCP data.tis.trane.com
• No incoming ports required. All communication originates from the Tracer SC inside the
customer’s network, encrypted using SSL/TLS.
• ( A ) UDP port 1194 provides optimal TraneConnect performance.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 33
The User Interface
The Tracer SC user interface provides an easy way for users to set up, operate, and modify a
building automation system. The home page contains system status information and links to
navigate to all areas of the system. The navigational elements are described in the following
table.
Table 8. Navigating the user interface
Button/Menu
Number Description
Functions
6 2
3
4
5
This is visible on every page. From left to right, the bar contains:
• Favorites Click this button to save frequently Tracer SC UI pages.
• Home Click this button at anytime to return to your home page.
• Alarms Shortcut to the Alarms page. If a new alarm or event has been
detected by the system since the Alarms page, the Alarms icon flashes.
• User... Provides access to:
– Logout
– Enable/disable automatic tree opening
– Preferred data view (tabular or graphical)
– Table filtering
– Regional preferences
Global Navigation – Data display units
1
Bar – Change password
• Admin... Provides access to roles and users.
– Appears only if the user has administrative privileges.
– A role is a collection of access rights to equipment, functions, and
applications. Users are assigned to roles. The role assignment
determines a user’s access rights.
– Six pre-defined user roles exist in the Tracer SC. These roles can be used
as is, or as a basis to create additional roles. Roles define the extent to
which a user is allowed to perform specific functions.
– Each user is assigned a role. If you make a change to a role, all users
assigned to that role will have their permissions changed, as prescribed
by the updated role.
• Help Opens the complete Tracer SC help system.
Outdoor
2 Shows current outdoor temperature and humidity.
Conditions
3 Contextual Help Opens a help topic that pertains only to the information on the page in view.
34 BAS-SVX31U-EN
The User Interface
Table 8. Navigating the user interface (continued)
Button/Menu
Number Description
Functions
Internal Scroll An internal scroll bar is available for pages that contain long lists of data and
4
Bar multiple sections.
Contains a list of menu items that are linked to features, applications, and
Left Navigation
5 equipment. Some menu items, when selected, expand to reveal a sub-menu of
Menu
related items.
A customized view of user-selected elements in the HVAC system. You can group,
6 Navigation Tree order, name elements, and assign custom graphics to the tree nodes according to
your preferences.
Applying Table Filters

Table filtering allows you to see only selected data by setting up rules and conditions. The option
to filter tables is available on the following pages:
• Alarms and Events
• Data Logs
• Reports
• Spaces
• Area, VAS, Chiller Plant (Alarms Tab)
To apply a table filter:
1. From one of the above mentioned pages, click the filter icon. The Filter dialog box
appears.
2. From the C o l u m n drop-down list, select a column on which to base your filter.
3. From the C o n d i t i o n drop-down list, select a condition.
4. In the V a l u e field, enter a value that the selected Column and Condition will filter.
5. Click Filter. The table displays results based on the applied filter.
6. Click the button to add a rule. Up to three rules can be added to a filter.
7. Use the M a t c h drop-down list to include all rules or any rules.
To remove the filter, click C l e a r f i l t e r located directly above the first entry in the table in
which you are viewing.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 35
The Navigation Tree
The navigation tree contains the logically ordered and grouped content of all the elements of
your HVAC system. The navigation tree populates automatically when spaces, systems, points,
and equipment are installed. A navigation tree provides an alternate way to navigate through the
user interface. The navigation tree consists of nodes, display text, and icons. You build the tree
by choosing display text for nodes, arranging the nodes, and assigning associated graphics. The
graphics represent equipment and areas of the facility.
Figure 9. Using the Tracer SC navigation tree
Click to open
the navigation
tree
Click to expand
the contents of
a node
Use the edit bar to move

nodes, add graphics, or
remove items from
the tree
Using the Navigation Tree

Click the arrow icon on the navigation tree to expand the tree and display the contents. The
navigation tree can be customized according to your preferences and facility needs. The tree
must be unlocked before any changes can be made. Click the chain link icon located at the
bottom of the tree.
N o t e : To save edits made to the navigation tree, you must lock the tree by clicking the chain link
icon.
36 BAS-SVX31U-EN
The Navigation Tree
Figure 10. Accessing the navigation tree
Drag a Tracer SC Component onto the Tree

You can create nodes on the tree by dragging them from the title of a Tracer® SC component
onto the tree. Click and drag a component from the Tracer SC page onto the tree. An image
representing the component appears red, then green when it glides over a valid area. Depending
on where you locate the dropped image, the new node will appear under the node you drop it
onto. To save your changes, lock the navigation tree by clicking the chain link icon.
Figure 11. Dragging a Tracer SC component onto the tree
Drag a Tree Component onto the Home Button

Click and drag a component from the navigation tree as shown in the following figure, or from
the title of an Tracer SC component on the page to the Home button. To save your changes, lock
the navigation tree by clicking the icon.
Figure 12. Dragging components from the tree
BAS-SVX31U-EN 37
The Navigation Tree
Drag a Tree Component onto the Home Button

Click and drag a component from the navigation tree as shown below, or from the title of an
Tracer SC component on the page to the Home button. To save your changes, lock the navigation
tree by clicking the icon.
Figure 13. Dragging components from the tree
Drag Tree Nodes to Other Locations

Nodes can be dragged and dropped to other locations on the tree. When a node is dropped onto
another node that is currently not a folder, the node icon will then appear as a folder icon.
Multiple nodes can be selected at the same time by clicking on multiple nodes. To save your
changes, lock the navigation tree by clicking the icon.
Rename Tree Nodes

Nodes on the tree can be renamed directly within the tree. Rename a node by “slow” clicking on
the tree node while in unlocked mode. Slow is defined as two clicks on the same node spaced
between 1 and 5 seconds apart. This places the name of the node in edit mode, in which the old
name can be deleted and the new one entered. To save your changes, lock the navigation tree by
clicking the chain link icon.
Add a Custom Graphics Node to the Tree

1. Click the custom graphics icon located on the edit bar.
2. The A d d a C u s t o m G r a p h i c s N o d e t o t h e T r e e dialog box appears.
3. Select a graphic from list. (A filtering option is available for your convenience).
4. Click N e x t .
5. If the graphic is associated with a template, a tree with all the devices on the SC is displayed.
You can then select the equipment with which to associate the graphic. If the graphic is not
associated with a template, a pane with the ability to save the graphic is displayed.
6. Save the graphic (template or otherwise).
Edit a Node on the Tree

1. Click to select one or more nodes on the tree.
2. Click the edit node icon located on the edit bar.

3. The E d i t N o d e s dialog box appears.
4. Select an action: Modify custom graphic assignment, or Reset custom node labels to default.
5. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to complete the action.
Add a Custom Folder to the Tree

1. Click the add folder icon located on the edit bar.
2. A new folder appears at the bottom of the tree, or below a selected node.
38 BAS-SVX31U-EN
The Navigation Tree
3. Click once on the folder to place in edit mode; rename the folder.
Delete a Node from the Tree

1. Select a node or folder on the tree (text displays in bold when properly selected).
2. Click the delete icon located on the edit bar.

3. The selected item is deleted.
Undo a Change to the Tree
While editing the tree, you can undo a change by clicking on the undo icon Actions can be
undone back to the point where the tree was unlocked for editing. The undo icon will be active
only when there are actions that can be undone.
Redo a Previously Undone Change to the Tree

While editing the tree, you can redo a previously undone change by clicking on the redo icon
The redo stack is cleared once a new operation is performed. The redo icon will be active only
when there are actions that can be redone.
Reset the Tree to Standard Configuration

You can reset the tree to its standard configuration by clicking on the reset icon .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 39
User Accounts and Administration
User accounts hold the necessary information required for a user to interface with the system.
Administrative rights grant the user the ability to manage user accounts, create and delete users
and reset passwords. There must be at least one “administrator” of the system (the last
administrator cannot be deleted.)
Each system user can be setup with a unique user ID and a role assignment that dictates the level
of access to systems, equipment, tools and more.
User administrator functions are accessed from the global navigation bar located on the upper
right corner of the screen as shown in the following figure. These functions include setting up
and editing new users and roles, and establishing secure passwords.
N o t e : The Admin selection only appears on the global navigation bar if the user has
administrative privileges.
Figure 14. Accessing administrative functions
Best Practices for User Accounts

Trane recommends establishing at least two user accounts that grant administrative access: One
for Trane technicians, and the second account reserved for the customer.
Trane technician user account
• To be used primarily for service and troubleshooting
• The account should grant full access to everything in the system including administrative
• access.
• Account user should be assigned Installer/Programmer role
• Tracer SC includes this user account for initial setup and programming (by default)
Customer user account
• At least one account should be set up that grants administrative access in order to create and
manage other users in the system.
– Should be assigned a role appropriate for daily tasks.
• An additional Super User account can be set up that is responsible for monitoring all
equipment and applications in the system.
– Account user should be assigned the Installer/Programmer role with administrative
access.
Creating a New User

The following is a high-level procedure designed to provide you with the basic navigational
steps. For more detailed instructions while creating a new user, click the help icon located on
each user interface page.
To create a new user:
1. From the global navigation bar, click A d m i n > U s e r s , which opens the U s e r s page.
2. Click the C r e a t e U s e r button. The P e r s o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n page appears.
40 BAS-SVX31U-EN
3. Enter the user’s personal information, and then click N e x t .
Figure 15. Create new user (personal information)
4. On the P r e f e r e n c e s page, determine how certain attributes on the Tracer® SC user interface
will appear. Click N e x t .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 41
Figure 16. Create new user (preferences)
5. On the D a t a D i s p l a y U n i t s P r e f e r e n c e s page, determine the unit type in which data will be

displayed. Click N e x t .
Figure 17. Create new user (data display units)
42 BAS-SVX31U-EN
6. On the T r a c e r C o n c i e r g e D i s p l a y S e t t i n g s page, define the Tracer Concierge Display

settings. (This page is visible only if the device has a valid Tracer Concierge Display Settings
License uploaded.) Click N e x t .
7.
Figure 18. Create new user (Tracer Concierge)
8. On the C u s t o m G r a p h i c s A c c e s s page, select the custom graphics that the user will be able
to access. Click N e x t .
Figure 19. Create new user (custom graphics access)
9. On the S u m m a r y page, review your selections. Click F i n i s h to save the new user.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 43
Creating a New Role

Roles are assigned to users to govern the level of permission they have to access the
applications and equipment in the Tracer® SC. There are eight predefined roles to choose from.
Custom roles can be created to provide the exact level of access required. (The predefined roles
cannot be edited or deleted).
The following is a high-level procedure designed to provide you with the basic navigational
steps. For more detailed instructions while creating a new role, click the help icon located on
each user interface page.
To create a new role:
1. From the global navigation bar, click A d m i n > R o l e s , which opens the R o l e s page.
2. Click the C r e a t e r o l e button. The R o l e I n f o r m a t i o n page appears.
3. Complete the fields, and then click N e x t .
The Base Role is a template that is used as a starting point for defining access to the system.
The maximum override priority will dictate the level of control granted to the user. The higher
the precedence given to the user’s overrides in the system.
Figure 20. Create new role (information)
4. On the E q u i p m e n t P e r m i s s i o n s page, determine the permission levels for equipment. Click

Next.
44 BAS-SVX31U-EN
5. On the A p p l i c a t i o n P e r m i s s i o n s page, determine the application permission levels. Click

Next.
Figure 21. Create new role (application permissions)
6. On the F u n c t i o n A c c e s s page, select the functions that users in this role will have access to.
User responsible for configuration and programming for Tracer SC should have access to
Installation and Service.
Figure 22. Create new role (function access)
7. On the S u m m a r y page, review your selections. Click F i n i s h to save the new role.
User Security
Tracer® SC administrators determine password requirements for all users on this page. As an
administrator, you can select or deselect to activate the following options:
• P a s s w o r d R e q u i r e s M i x e d C a s e — Must contain at least one lower case or upper case letter.
• P a s s w o r d R e q u i r e s N u m b e r — Must contain at least one number.
• P a s s w o r d R e q u i r e s S y m b o l — Must contain at least one symbol such as %, $, #, @.
• P a s s w o r d M a y N o t C o n t a i n U s e r I n f o r m a t i o n — Cannot contain the user ID name.
• P a s s w o r d M i n i m u m L e n g t h — The minimum number of required characters is 6. Use the
spinner box to select a number.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 45
• N u m b e r o f P r e v i o u s P a s s w o r d s B l o c k e d F r o m R e u s e — Users are prohibited from

creating a new password by reusing their most previous password. This can be extended
beyond the most previous for heightened security. The valid range is 1 to 75. Use the spinner
box to select a number.
• E n f o r c e P a s s w o r d E x p i r a t i o n — Select this check box to require users to create a new
password when their current passwords expire.
N o t e : The following words are prohibited from use as part of the user password: Trane,
Tracer, Admin, Password.
• D a y s U n t i l E x p i r a t i o n — Use the spinner box to select the maximum number of days that
passwords are valid until a new one must be created. Valid range is 7 to 365.
Figure 23. Password security setup
Remote Access to a Tracer BAS

Trane recommends using Trane Connect Remote Access, a pre-engineered, secure IT
technology, for remote access. For more information about Trane Connect Remote Access, refer
to the Intelligent Services Software User Interface for Trane Connect Remote Access User Guide,
(BAS-SVU22). If the Tracer BAS does not have access to the internet, a Tracer Cellular Router can
be used. For more information about the cellular router solution, including ordering information
and remote access, refer to the Tracer Cellular Router Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
Guide, (BAS-SVX067).
46 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Alarms
The alarm handling capabilities of Tracer SC allow users to receive, view, acknowledge, and
make comments on building alarms and events. An event that is triggered by the detection of an
abnormal or critical operating condition is generally considered to be an alarm. If a critical alarm
exists, an alarm icon flashes in the global navigation bar, which remains visible in the right
corner of every page of the user interface.
The Alarms page contains a list of alarms that have been detected by the system. Data displayed
in the Alarm log includes when and where the event occurred and whether operator
acknowledgment is required.
As of version 4.3, the Alarm log also includes the value of the data associated with the alarm.
Figure 24. Alarms log
Alarm Configuration
Alarm configuration consists of:
• Assigning or creating categories (previously called severities).
• Assigning or creating notification classes.
• Routing alarm e-mail.
• Enable audible alarm notification.
• Creating alarm message templates.
Click Alarm Configuration from the left navigation menu to open the Alarm Configuration page.
Alarm Categories
You can categorize alarms to determine how they appear in the Alarm log. A category is
assigned to one of 255 priorities. In previous versions of Tracer® SC, alarm categories were
limited to four types: Severe, Critical, Advisory, and Information. Now, you can create additional
categories and select an accompanying icon. Benefits of customizing alarm categories include
the ability to send a specific alarm to a specific person, and to differentiate critical equipment
alarms from others.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 47
Alarms
Creating Alarm Categories

1. Click A l a r m C o n f i g u r a t i o n > A l a r m C a t e g o r i e s . The Alarm Categories page opens.
2. Click E d i t . The table expands to show a list of priorities. (The smaller the number, the higher
the priority).
3. Click on a row that is labeled Unmapped, and then click C r e a t e C a t e g o r y .
4. To select an icon, click on the icon symbol to expand icon choices. a new and then click
Create Category. one in the Name field. Click the Save button located within the category.
N o t e : Be mindful of the priority you are mapping. For example, you might want a category
for a Chiller’s transition to the alarm state to be mapped to a higher priority opposed to
a Chiller’s return to normal state.
Figure 25. Creating or editing alarm categories
Edit an Alarm Category

1. From the A l a r m C a t e g o r i e s page, click the e d i t button.
2. Click on the specific category and then click E d i t C a t e g o r y .
3. To change the icon, click on the existing icon to expand icon choices. To change the name,
type a new one in the Name field. Click the S a v e button located within the category.
4. Repeat the above steps if you have additional categories to edit.
5. Click the S a v e button located at the bottom right corner of the page after all your edits have
been made.
Unmap an Alarm Category
1. From the Alarm Categories page, click the edit button.
2. Click on a specific category and then click Unmap Category. This will remove the category
from any notification classes to which it has been mapped.
3. Repeat the above steps if you have additional categories to unmap.
4. Click the Save button located at the bottom right corner of the page after all your edits have
been made.
Notification Classes
When a device has a problem or a fault, such as when the present value of a property rises above
a predetermined level, a notification class object defines where a device will send an alarm and
the priority of that alarm.
Tracer SC and Tracer unit controllers have their own list of notification classes used for alarm
routing. The notification classes in Tracer SC are used for points and applications in Tracer SC
only and cannot be assigned to a point in a BACnet unit controller. Likewise, each unit controller
uses its own list of notification classes to route alarms.
48 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Alarms
The most common notification classes are:

• HVAC-Critical
• HVAC-Information
• HVAC-Service Required
• HVAC-Warning
Creating Notification Classes

Create notification classes in Tracer SC after you have created alarm categories.
1. From the Tracer SC left navigation menu, click A l a r m C o n f i g u r a t i o n > N o t i f i c a t i o n C l a s s e s .
The N o t i f i c a t i o n C l a s s e s page opens.
2. To view or edit a notification class click on the class name, which opens the definitions page
(see the following figure). To make changes, click E d i t . To create a class, click C r e a t e
Notification Class.
N o t e : The following instructions also apply to creating a notification class.
1. In the C l a s s D e f i n i t i o n section edit or enter a name for the notification class, and a
description (optional).
2. In the A l a r m / E v e n t P r i o r i t i e s , select an alarm priority/category for each transition and
whether or not acknowledgment is required. The state of a point is determined by its
internal logic. When a point changes from its current state to another state, a transition
has occurred and an event is generated by the point. A point is always in one of the
following three states:
• O f f N o r m a l : Indicates that the object is functioning correctly, but the value is outside
the user-defined range.
• T o F a u l t : Indicates that the object is not functioning correctly and the value is
unreliable.
• T o N o r m a l : Indicates that the object is functioning correctly and the value is within
the user-defined range.
As of version 4.3, recipients can be added or deleted manually.
3. In the Recipients section select which transitions will be sent to the listed recipients, and the
days and the time of day in which they will be notified
4. Click S a v e .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 49
Alarms
Figure 26. Creating or editing notification classes
Routing Alarm E-mail

Alarm routing consists of rules (or routes), in which alarms are be sent by way of e-mail to
specified users. The alarm routing list shows where and when specified alarms will be routed. It
is best practice to set up alarm e-mail routing after alarm categories and notification classes have
been created. Use the A c t i o n s button to edit or delete routing rules.
To initiate alarm e-mail routing, routing rules must be configured.
An event routing rule dictates that events mapped to a specified severity value be sent to a
specified operator. The rule contains a routing schedule that specifies when e-mails are sent.
Routing rules are created on the C r e a t e R o u t i n g R u l e page. After saving a routing rule, it
appears on the R o u t i n g E v e n t E - m a i l page.
Adding a Routing Rule

1. From the left navigation menu, click A l a r m C o n f i g u r a t i o n > R o u t i n g A l a r m E - m a i l . From the
R o u t i n g A l a r m E - m a i l page, click A d d R o u t i n g R u l e . The C r e a t e R o u t i n g R u l e page
appears as shown in the following figure.
2. In the S e l e c t U s e r section, select the users who will be notified about specified alarms.
N o t e : E-mail addresses are specified in Tracer SC user profiles.
3. In the S e l e c t C a t e g o r y section, select alarm categories that the users will be notified about.
As of Tracer SC V4.3, you can now define the destination of the routed alarms, which include e-
mail, cellular phone, or a combination of both.
4. In the S e t R o u t i n g S c h e d u l e section, specify the days and times in which users will be
notified of new alarms.
5. Click S a v e . The R o u t i n g E v e n t E - m a i l page appears, which shows the routing rules that you
just created.
50 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Alarms
Figure 27. Creating a routing rule
Enabling Audible Alarm Notification

1. From the Alarm Configuration page, click A u d i b l e A l a r m N o t i f i c a t i o n , then click E d i t .
2. Select to enable (or disable) the A l a r m N o t i f i c a t i o n S o u n d .
3. Use the radio buttons to select default audio or custom audio. For custom audio, use the
browse feature to make a selection.
4. Click S a v e .
Figure 28. Audible Alarm Notification
Alarm Message Templates

Alarm message templates allow you to control the amount of data to match the recipients device.
As an example, cellular text has a character limit. Templates allow you to assign a factory-default
template as an e-mail or a cellular template. Custom templates can also be created. Templates
that have been assigned will be used to draft the alert message that will be sent to the user
BAS-SVX31U-EN 51
Alarms
through the selected messaging service (e-mail or cellular text).

To create an alarm message template:
1. On the Alarm Configuration page, click A l a r m M e s s a g e T e m p l a t e s .
2. On the Alarm Message Templates page, click C r e a t e T e m p l a t e . The C r e a t e M e s s a g e
T e m p l a t e dialog opens.
3. Enter a name in the A l a r m M e s s a g e N a m e field. For example, "Comm Loss."
4. Enter a description in the D e s c r i p t i o n field. For example, "Send this message when Comm
Loss occurs."
5. In the A l a r m M e s s a g e S u b j e c t field, enter a short message that briefly describes the
specifics of the event. You can also use terms by selecting from the Place Holders list, then
click the A d d button.
N o t e : When a message is delivered the Place Holders will display corresponding values at the
time the message was generated. For example, the "Facility Name" place holder will
display the name of the facility as defined in the system controller.
6. In the Alarm Message Body, compose a message that corresponds to the alarm message
name and description. Use place holders to indicate important details that should be included
in the message. (See the following figure.)
7. Click S a v e .
Figure 29. Example of an Alarm Message template (template body)
To assign a message template:

1. On the Alarm Configuration page, click A l a r m M e s s a g e T e m p l a t e s .
2. Select a message template from the list, then click the A c t i o n s button and select A s s i g n . The
A s s i g n M e s s a g e T e m p l a t e s dialog opens.
N o t e : The Actions button is displayed only if the user has Alarm configuration permission.
3. Determine the user or users to which the template will be assigned, then select whether the
message will be transmitted by e-mail or cellular.
4. Click S a v e . A confirmation dialog box appears. Click S a v e A s s i g n m e n t s .
To delete a message template:
1. Select a message template from the list, then click the A c t i o n s button and select D e l e t e . The
D e l e t e C o n f i r m a t i o n dialog opens.
N o t e : The Actions button is displayed only if the user has Alarm configuration permission.
2. Click D e l e t e to confirm.
Alarm Setup in Point Configuration

In Tracer® SC, each point can be configured to generate alarms under specific conditions.
52 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Alarms
Configuring System-defined Points

Use the following procedure to configure system-defined points:
1. From the left navigation menu, select E q u i p m e n t or S p a c e s . The E q u i p m e n t or S p a c e s list
page appears.
2. Select the preferred equipment from the n a m e column, which opens the status page.
3. Select the D e t a i l s tab, which displays all the system-defined points.
4. Select the name of the point that you want to set up for alarming, which opens the point
status page.
5. On the point status page, select the C o n f i g u r a t i o n tab.
6. Configure the point and then click S a v e .
Configuring User-defined Points

Use the following procedure to configure user-defined points:
1. From the left navigation menu, select P o i n t s , and then select Analog, Binary, or Multistate,
then select the point type (input, output, value). The selected points list page appears.
2. Select the name of the point that you want to set up for alarming, which opens the point
status page.
3. On the point status page, select the C o n f i g u r a t i o n tab..
4. Configure the point and click S a v e .
Analog Point Configuration

On the Analog Point Configuration page, you define the conditions that generate alarms for
analog points.
N o t e : The following figure and the content below show the contents of the analog input
configuration page. For help with other point types, refer to the Tracer® SC online help.
Figure 30. Analog Point Configuration
BAS-SVX31U-EN 53
Alarms
Point Settings
• N a m e — Enter a name for the point.
• D e s c r i p t i o n — Enter a detailed description of the point function. This is an optional
configuration.
• U n i t s — The type of measurement that the point is configured to read. This property, along
with the user preferred units, determines the type of units that a user sees on the screen. For
example, if Units is configured for temperature and the user preference for temperature is
Celsius (°C), then all relevant point information is shown in °C units.
• R e f e r e n c e — Click the reference icon to select a referencer for the point. Select a binary or
multistate point. The point must reside in Tracer SC. External referencing is not allowed.
• U p d a t e I n t e r v a l — The update interval defines the frequency at which the point requests the
value of its reference. To configure the update interval, select the amount of time and a time
unit. The suggested minimum interval is 10 seconds.
• M i n i m u m V a l u e — Enter a minimum value for the point before it will enter a fault state. The
point value is capable of reporting a value below the minimum value, but any referenced
value sent by the point will be capped at the minimum value. The system will not allow users
to override a point at a value less than the minimum value. Third party systems are typically
not affected by these parameters while performing overrides.
• M a x i m u m V a l u e — Enter a maximum value for the point before it will enter a fault state. The
point value is capable of reporting a value above the maximum value, but any referenced
value sent by the point will be capped at the maximum value. The system will not allow users
to override a point at a value greater than the maximum value. Third party systems are
typically not affected by these parameters while performing overrides.
• C h a n g e o f V a l u e I n c r e m e n t — The Change of Value Increment triggers the point to send the
new current value to all subscriptions. When exceeded, and there is a change of value (COV)
subscription for the point, the point sends the recipient of the subscription the new point
value. For example, if the COV increment is set at 1.0 and the current value changes by 0.8,
notification is not sent. However, if the current value changes by 1.1 since the last update, the
point will send the new value to all subscriptions.
• M u l t i p l i e r — The multiplier value reads the referencer value of the point and then multiplies
it by the current multiplier value.
• O f f s e t — The offset value is added to the raw point value. If the offset is positive, the value
will be added to the referenced value. If the offset is negative, the value will be subtracted
from the referenced value.
Alarm Settings: Alarm Condition
• E n a b l e / D i s a b l e P o i n t A l a r m i n g — Click this button to enable or disable point alarming.
Point alarming must be enabled in order to configure alarm conditions. Disabling point
alarming turns off all alarming functionality for the point (limits, failures, transitions).
• High/Low Limits Alarming — This feature detects whether the value of the point exceeds the
range defined by the high and low limits. The limits can be enabled or disabled. If disabled,
the point value range will have no high or low limit; therefore, an alarm will not be triggered.
Disabling limits is useful when the space is unoccupied. When the Outside Limits Calculation
is enabled, and the value of the point exceeds the high or low limit, the point will transition to
the OFF-Normal state (In Alarm). When High/Low Limits Alarming is disabled, the point will
not transition to the OFF-Normal (In Alarm) state if the point's value exceeds the limits.
• L o w L i m i t : A value lower than the low limit generates an alarm.
• H i g h L i m i t : A value higher than the high limit generates an alarm.
• D e a d b a n d : This value is set to prevent rapid transition between states, which generates
nuisance alarms. The deadband functions as follows:
– If an alarm condition exists because the low limit has been exceeded, the value must be
greater than the low limit plus the deadband to return to normal operating conditions.
– If an alarm condition exists because the high limit has been exceeded, the value must be
less than the high limit minus the deadband to return to normal operating conditions.
54 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Alarms
• T i m e D e l a y : If an alarm condition exists, time delay is the amount of time to elapse before an
alarm is generated.
• A d d A l a r m C o n d i t i o n : Click this button to create secondary alarm conditions that occur in
situations outside the primary alarm conditions. It works in conjunction with the High/Low
Limits Alarming feature. For example, a space temperature setpoint is configured to go into
alarm if the temperature drops below 65 degrees. However, if you do not want the alarm to
be activated when the space is unoccupied, High/Low Limits Alarming prevents this from
occurring. But there is still a need for an alarm if the space temperature drops below 50
degrees. Therefore, you can create additional alarm conditions to trigger an alarm when the
space drops below 50 degrees.
Alarm Settings: Event Notification
• N o t i f i c a t i o n c l a s s : See The “Notification Classes” section in this guide.
N o t i f y t y p e : If a l a r m is selected, the point will appear in the A l l I t e m s i n A l a r m site
report if the point is in O u t s i d e L i m i t s when the report is run.
• O u t s i d e L i m i t s : If O n is selected, an alarm generates when the L o w L i m i t or H i g h L i m i t , as
specified in Alarm Condition, is exceeded.
• W h e n F a i l e d : If O n is selected, an alarm generates if the M i n i m u m V a l u e or the M a x i m u m
V a l u e , as set in the Point Settings section, is exceeded.
• R e t u r n t o N o r m a l : If O n is selected, an alarm generates when point status returns to normal.
Alarm Settings: Program Trigger
Program Trigger is not affected by the Add Alarm Condition feature.
• P r o g r a m N a m e : If selected, the associated TGP program will run when the selected event
state occurs.
• R u n P r o g r a m W h e n : The selected program will run when a specific event state is selected.
Binary Point Configuration

On the Binary Point Configuration page, you define the conditions that generate alarms for
binary points.
N o t e : The following figure and the content below show the contents of the binary value
Figure 31. Binary value configuration
BAS-SVX31U-EN 55
Alarms
Point Settings
• H e a r t b e a t — Use the drop-down list to enable or disable this function.
• H e a r t b e a t I n t e r v a l — Enter the maximum amount of time in which the point must receive a
command. If the point is not commanded within this interval, the point will enter a fault state.
• A c t i v e T e x t — This text appears when the binary point is true.
• I n a c t i v e T e x t — This text appears when the binary point is false.
• D e f a u l t V a l u e — This is the default value of the point. The point reverts to this value if the
point is not in control by another application or overridden by the user (priority array is
empty).
• M i n i m u m O n T i m e — This is the minimum time that the point must remain on when it
transitions from Off to On before it will respond to an Off command. Configuring this value to
zero disables the minimum on timer. Select an amount of time and a time unit.
• M i n i m u m O f f T i m e — This is the minimum time that the point must remain off when it
transitions from On to Off before it will respond to an on command. Configuring this value to
zero disables the minimum off timer. Select an amount of time and a time unit.
• A l a r m C o n d i t i o n — To conditionally enable/disable high/low limit alarming set a reference
to a Binary or Multistate point and select the states that will enable alarming. When the value
of the reference matches the defined states, alarming is enabled. The point reference for
alarming is limited to points that reside within the controller, there is no off-box referencing.
• A l a r m V a l u e : Defines the alarm state (either active or inactive).
• T i m e D e l a y : If an alarm condition exists, time delay is the amount of time to elapse before an
alarm is generated.
• N o t i f i c a t i o n c l a s s : See the “Alarm configuration” section of this guide.
• N o t i f i c a t i o n T y p e : If alarm is selected, the point will appear in the A l l I t e m s i n A l a r m site
report if the point is I n A l a r m when the report is run.
• I n A l a r m : Identifies the state that will initiate an event.
• W h e n F a i l e d : If O n is selected, an alarm generates if no valid value exists (point in fault).
• R e t u r n t o N o r m a l : If O n is selected, an alarm generates if the point returns to its non-alarm
state.
state occurs.
Multistate Point Configuration

On the Multistate Point Configuration page, you define the conditions that generate alarms for
multistate points.
N o t e : The following figure and the content below show the contents of the multistate output
56 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Alarms
Figure 32. Multistate output configuration
Point Settings: Multistate Point Values:

• R e f e r e n c e — Select a referencer for the point by clicking the referencer icon. Referencers
obtain values and state status from another source within the system, such as the fan-speed
selector switch on a thermostat. Any multistate point can be referenced. However, when the
S e n d v a l u e s e n t e r e d b e l o w i n s t e a d o f s t a t e s check box is selected only an analog point
can be referenced. See note below.
• U p d a t e I n t e r v a l — The update interval defines the frequency at which the point requests the
value of its reference. The suggested minimum interval is 10 seconds.
• H e a r t b e a t — Use the drop-down list to enable or disable this function.
• H e a r t b e a t I n t e r v a l — Enter the maximum amount of time in which the point must receive a
command. If the point is not commanded within this interval, the point will enter a fault state.
• N u m b e r o f S t a t e s — Enter the number of states for the point.
• S t a t e n a m e — Enter a descriptive state name in this field.
• S e n d v a l u e s e n t e r e d b e l o w i n s t e a d o f s t a t e s — Select this check box to reference analog
values and convert to state values. This option adds a value column to the table and a
deadband field.
• When the "S
Se n d v a l u e s e n t e r e d b e l o w i n s t e a d o f s t a t e s " check box is selected:
• Trane multistate input points have the enhanced capability of referencing analog values and
then converting them to state values. This feature is enabled by selecting the S e n d v a l u e s
e n t e r e d b e l o w i n s t e a d o f s t a t e s check box. When enabled, an analog point must be
referenced and the analog value table and the deadband value must be defined.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 57
Alarms
• A l a r m C o n d i t i o n — To conditionally enable/disable high/low limit alarming set a reference

to a Binary or Multistate point and select the states that will enable alarming. When the value
of the reference matches the defined states, alarming is enabled. The point reference for
alarming is limited to points that reside within the controller, there is no off-box referencing.
• F e e d b a c k R e f e r e n c e — This is the value that the referencer uses to compare the actual state
of the point. If the feedback referencer value and the point value do not match continuously
for a period of time that exceeds the event time delay, the point will enter an alarm state.
• Command Failure alarm is generated when the feedback referencer is selected and the
feedback referencer value does not match the value of the binary output point. A Command
Successful message is generated when the feedback referencer value matches the value of
the binary output point and the point is already in Command Failure state.
• T i m e D e l a y — This is the amount of time that must elapse when the point is out of range
before the point will enter an alarm or fault condition. Time delay also applies when a point is
returned to a normal condition.
• N o t i f i c a t i o n c l a s s : See .
• N o t i f i c a t i o n T y p e : If A l a r m is selected, the point will appear in the A l l I t e m s i n A l a r m site
report if the point is I n A l a r m when the report is run.
• I n A l a r m : If O n is selected, an alarm is generates if the point enters one of the defined alarm
states.
• W h e n F a i l e d : If O n is selected, an alarm generates if the point enters one of the defined
failure states.
• R e t u r n t o N o r m a l : If O n is selected, an alarm generates if the point enters one of the defined
normal states.
state occurs.
58 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Data Logs
Data Logging, also referred to as trending, records in real-time the value of a data point in the
system and the time at which the value was recorded.
By default, Tracer SC automatically generates system-created data logs (for equipment and
standard applications) on a 15-minute interval and then stores that data for seven days. Data
storage is a continuous window where only the most recent seven days of data are stored. Data
older than seven days is discarded in order to make room for the newest data.
Users can also create data logs (either scheduled or triggered) by clicking the log data button on
equipment and applications pages, or by using the create data log wizard.
A list of data logs can be accessed by clicking D a t a L o g s from the left navigation menu. From
this page you can take action on a data log, such as comparing or exporting, by selecting one or
more data logs and then clicking the A c t i o n s button.
Figure 33. Data Logs page
Using the Trend Viewer

The trend viewer displays trend data in a chart. The trend viewer supports a time comparison
mode that allows you to compare trend data at different points in time (day-to-day, month-to-
month, year-to-year). A maximum of six data logs are supported (up to two data logs when time
comparison mode is enabled). A maximum of two types of dimensionality are supported on the
left and right y axis. Samples are plotted on a date/time scale on the x axis. Samples in fault (due
to communication loss) are not plotted and will result in an interpolation gap within the plotted
line. if all samples are in fault, no line will be displayed.
The trend viewer is available on the data logs tab of status pages for equipment and systems. To
view trends graphically, select up to six data logs from the Data logs page and then select V i e w
d a t a from the A c t i o n s button.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 59
Data Logs
Figure 34. Tracer SC+ Trend Viewer
4 3 4
Duration preset buttons and Export/Options buttons The duration preset buttons change
the range of data displayed in the trend as described below:
1d — displays one day of data
1w — displays 1 week of data
1m — displays one month of data

1
1y — displays one year of data
Max — displays all available data
Export — displays options for printing or exporting the chart data in various formats (SVG, PNG,
JPEG, PDF, CSV, XLS).
Options — displays options to hide or display the legend, or hide or display tooltips.
Indicators display the nearest sampled point on the chart. The indicators show up as a circle with
2
a light gray outline. Each indicator will be filled with the color of the associated trend line.
The Range Slider represents the range of data displayed in the trend. Click and drag the range
3
slider to shift the date and time of the data displayed in the plot.
Bumper buttons shift the date and time in small increments. Bumper buttons are available to
4
shift the data to the left and the right.
Z o o m i n g : You can zoom in and out of the range of all trends by clicking and dragging your
mouse in the preferred area on the chart. Click the Reset Zoom button to return to normal view.
Creating a Scheduled Data Log

Scheduled data logs collect data based on a scheduled start and stop time.
To create a scheduled data log:
1. Click the C r e a t e D a t a L o g button located on the Data Logs page.
The C r e a t e D a t a L o g – S e l e c t D a t a p o i n t s page appears.
2. Select data points from the M e m b e r S e l e c t i o n T r e e and click A d d to move to the s e l e c t e d
60 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Data Logs
i t e m s frame. Click N e x t .
3. On the C r e a t e D a t a L o g – C h o o s e T y p e page, select D a t a c o l l e c t i o n s t a r t s o n a s c h e d u l e
and then click N e x t .
4. On the C r e a t e D a t a L o g – C o l l e c t i o n S t a r t a n d S t o p page, enter a a start date and time for
collection to begin.
5. In the C o l l e c t i o n S t o p frame, select a method that will stop data collection.
• O n e - t i m e d a t a c o l l e c t i o n – this option collects data for a short period of time (for
example, a 24-hour period).
• I n d e f i n i t e d a t a c o l l e c t i o n – this option allows for a continuous window of a defined
period of time. For example, seven days of data at 15-minute intervals. The seven day
window will always maintain data for the last seven days. The maximum window is three
years.
• R e p e a t i n g d a t a c o l l e c t i o n – this option allows for a defined period of collection that can
contain significantly more data (for example, 12 months at 15 minute intervals).
1. In the C o l l e c t i o n I n t e r v a l frame, enter the amount of time that passes between sample
collections.
2. Click N e x t . The C r e a t e D a t a L o g — S u m m a r y page appears.
3. Review the data log summary page and then click F i n i s h .
Figure 35. Creating a scheduled data log
Creating a Triggered Data Log

This type of data log collects data when triggered by a condition. For example, a triggered data
log could be set up to log the temperature of a space only when the fan is running.
1. Click the C r e a t e D a t a L o g button located on the Data Logs page.
2. The C r e a t e D a t a L o g – S e l e c t D a t a p o i n t s page appears.
3. Select data points from the M e m b e r S e l e c t i o n T r e e and click A d d to move to the s e l e c t e d
i t e m s frame.
4. Click N e x t . The C r e a t e D a t a L o g – C h o o s e T y p e page appears.
5. In the Data Log type frame, select D a t a c o l l e c t i o n s t a r t s o n a t r i g g e r .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 61
Data Logs
6. On the C r e a t e D a t a L o g – C o l l e c t i o n S t a r t a n d S t o p page, determine the conditions that

will trigger data collection by selecting a value from the s e l e c t i o n t r e e .
7. From the S t a r t c o l l e c t i n g d a t a w h e n drop-down list, select either Greater than or Less than
and then manually enter a value.
• S t o p c o l l e c t i n g d a t a w h e n t h e t r i g g e r c o n d i t i o n i s n o l o n g e r t r u e – this option stops
collecting data when the defined start trigger condition is no longer true. Additional
options to delay collection start/stop and resume data collection after a stop are available.
• S t o p c o l l e c t i n g d a t a a f t e r X t i m e – this option collects a sample for a defined period of
time after the trigger condition is met, and when collection begins (for example, a 24-hour
period).
• I n d e f i n i t e d a t a c o l l e c t i o n – this option allows for a continuous window of a defined
amount of time after the trigger condition is met and when collection begins. For
example, seven days of data at a 15-minute intervals. The seven day window will always
maintain the last seven days. The maximum window is seven days.
8. Optionally, you can check the D e l a y d a t a c o l l e c t i o n s t a r t b y box to determine an amount of
time to delay collection start after the trigger condition occurs.
9. In the C o l l e c t i o n S t o p frame, select a method to stop data collection.
10. In the D a t a B u f f e r frame, select a data buffer option.
11. In the C o l l e c t i o n I n t e r v a l frame, enter the amount of time that passes between sample
collection.
12. Click N e x t . The C r e a t e D a t a L o g – S u m m a r y page appears.
13. Review the data log summary page and then click f i n i s h (or previous to make changes).
62 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Data Logs
Figure 36. Creating a Triggered Data Log
BAS-SVX31U-EN 63
Spaces
Spaces refer to equipment that controls a single space, such as:
• Variable-air-volume (VAV) boxes
The Spaces page contains the most frequently needed data for equipment of these types.
Figure 37. Spaces page
To view a status page for a specific space, click an item in the N a m e column of the Spaces page.
The following figure shows an example of a spaces status page.
Figure 38. Spaces status page
64 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Equipment
Equipment is the function and role, or software representation, of the physical devices in the
Building Automation System (BAS). All devices are represented as equipment upon installation,
which makes them available to view and control by the BAS.
The following are examples of equipment:
• Air handling units (AHUs) — including rooftop, commercial self-contained, and built-up units
(modular climate changers) — that are either of the following types:
– Constant-volume AHUs, which perform space temperature control using a constant
airflow
– Variable-air-volume AHUs, which modulate the supply air, based on static or space
temperature control
The E q u i p m e n t list page contains the most frequently needed data for each piece of equipment
of these types.
Figure 39. Equipment list page
To view a status page for a specific piece of equipment, click an item in the name column of the
Equipment list page. The following figure shows an example of an equipment status page. On
the Equipment Status page you can navigate to Alarms, Data Logs, and Applications that are
specific to the equipment by clicking on the individual tabs. New data logs can be created by
clicking the L o g D a t a button.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 65
Equipment
Figure 40. Equipment status page
66 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Systems
Tracer® SC supports three system applications:
• Area
• Variable Air Systems (VAS)
• Chiller Plant Control (CPC)
The individual pages for each system component allow you to view status, configure the system
and its functions, and to view and add members.
Area Application
Area is an application that resides on the Tracer SC. The primary function of Area is to coordinate
the start and stop of equipment based on a schedule stored in the Tracer SC. An Area may
consist of a single room, a group of rooms, a large open warehouse, a manufacturing space, or
any grouping defined by a system user. Area allows such functions as synchronizing member
setpoints and controlling a large number of devices to be performed as one efficient operation.
Area can be configured to use multiple algorithms, along with area temperatures and humidity
inputs, to make an economizing decision.
Area also supports:
• Optimal start/stop
• Humidity pulldown
• Night purge
• Unoccupied heating/cooling setpoints
• Unoccupied humidify/dehumidify
• Timed override functions
Additionally, the Area application allows users to efficiently perform a single operation, such as
changing a setpoint, creating a schedule, performing an override, and apply it to all members of
the area. For more information, see the Air Systems for Tracer SC Applications Guide, (BAS-
APG007).
Variable Air Systems (VAS) Application

The variable air system (VAS) coordinates the control of air handlers, rooftop units, and variable
air volume terminal units. The VAS includes valuable tools to help manage tasks that were
previously problematic and time consuming, such as:
• Determining Heat/Cool mode for changeover systems
• Coordinating AHU and VAV box operation
• Commissioning VAV boxes
• Scheduling common spaces
• Optimizing ventilation
• Optimizing duct static pressure
For more information, see the Air Systems for Tracer Synchrony Application Guide, (BAS-
APGXXX).
Chiller Plant Control (CPC) Application

The Chiller Plant Control (CPC) application coordinates chillers and provides system chilled water
control.
The CPC application allows you to configure a chiller plant for optimal efficiency and reliability,
and provides a means for you to monitor and control the daily operation. Depending upon the
many possible chiller plant configurations and design differences, the CPC application can:
• Provide overall chiller plant status information and alarms to local and remote users.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 67
Systems
• Enable or disable chiller plants.

• Start, stop, and monitor the status of system chilled water pumps.
• Calculate individual chilled water setpoints for individual chillers in series chiller plants
• Request when chillers are added or subtracted according to building load requirements and
user-specified add and subtract logic
• Rotate chillers according to user-defined intervals
• Remove chillers from the rotation in the event
For more information, see the Chiller Plant Application Guide, (BAS-APG012).
68 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Points
In an automated building control system, points are the building blocks used to create a control
system. They are used in setpoints, controlling outputs on a device, reading the values of
hardware inputs and holding calculated data. In addition, points provide the only means to
generate and route alarms to the event log.
Tracer® SC defines points in two ways:
U s e r - d e f i n e d : You can create points to use, for example, with a TGP program or to monitor a
temperature for a building.
S y s t e m - d e f i n e d : These points are created when you create an Area, a VAS, and when you
install equipment or spaces.
Points Types
Tracer® SC classifies points according to one of three types (analog, binary, multistate) and one
of three functions (input, output, value). In total, there are nine point types:
• Analog inputs—These are typically values such as room temperature or air flow pressure
generated by a sensor or device. Inputs points obtain their value from a selected referencer.
Input points are typically used to read values from other controllers such as LonTalk devices
or unit controller input points.
• Analog outputs—These are used to control devices such as damper actuators or water valves,
or to provide setpoints to control other devices. Analog outputs can be controlled and
overridden by using priority control.
• Analog values—These are points that have real number values. Analog values do not contain
referencers but can be controlled and overridden by using priority control. Value points are
typically used for calculated values or setpoints.
• Binary inputs—These are typically two-state inputs, such as on/off or alarm/normal. Binary
inputs are generated by switching devices. Inputs points obtain their value from a selected
referencer. Input points are typically used to read values from other controllers such as
LonTalk devices or unit controller input points.
• Binary outputs—These points are typically used to turn devices on or off. Binary outputs can
be controlled and overridden by using priority control.
• Binary values—These points can only be true or false. Binary values do not contain
referencers but can be controlled and overridden by using priority control. Value points are
typically used for calculated values or setpoints.
• Multistate inputs— Multistate points have between 1 and 20 states. Text is displayed for each
state rather than a numerical value. Inputs points obtain their value from a selected
referencer. Input points are typically used to read values from other controllers such as
LonTalk devices or unit controller input points.
• Multistate outputs— Multistate points have between 1 and 20 states. Text is displayed for
each state rather than a numerical value. Multistate outputs can send their values to a defined
referencer and can be controlled and overridden by using priority control. Multistate outputs
are typically setpoints that are sent to controllers such as occupancy or heat cool mode
request on LonTalk controllers.
• Multistate values—Multistate points have between 1 and 20 states. Text is displayed for each
state rather than a numerical value. Multistate values do not contain referencers but can be
controlled and overridden by using priority control. Multistate values are typically calculated
values in controllers or applications such as such as occupancy status or heat cool mode
status.
User-defined Points
You can access user-defined points by selecting p o i n t s in the left navigation menu. The P o i n t s
page shows a table of all user-created points currently in the system, will appear.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 69
Points
The page is arranged with tabs: A n a l o g P o i n t s , B i n a r y P o i n t s , and M u l t i s t a t e P o i n t s . Each tab

of the table contains a sub-tab of the point type (input, output, or value). The table consists of the
following columns:
• Name —The identifiable name of the point
• Value —The current value of the point.
• Controlled by — The user of application currently controlling the point.
• Last control — The date and time that the point was last controlled.
• Actions — This column allows users to take action on a point by initiating an override,
stopping an override, or making changes to an existing override.
Figure 41. Points page
Viewing a User-defined Point Status Page

To view a point status page:
1. Select points in the left navigation menu to view the P o i n t s page, then select the point tab
(Analog, Binary, or Multi-state).
2. Select the point type sub-tab (Inputs, Outputs, or Values), and then select a point from the
table to view. The selected point status page opens.
The point status page shows the current status of the selected point.
There are two additional sub-tabs: Alarms and Data Logs. Click on the A l a r m s tab to view a
list of alarms for the point. Click on the D a t a L o g s tab to see a graphical view of data logs that
have been set up for the point.
70 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Points
Figure 42. Point status page
Creating a User-defined Point

New in Tracer® SC V4.1 is the option to add an additional alarm condition when creating or
editing analog points as shown in the following figure.
This creates a secondary alarm condition that occurs in situations outside the primary alarm
conditions. It works in conjunction with the High/Low Limits Alarming feature. Access the Tracer
SC Help at the user interface for more information.
N o t e : The Add Alarm Condition option is only available for Analog points.
1. From the P o i n t s page, click the C r e a t e P o i n t button and then select a point type. The Create
Point page for the selected point type will appear.
2. Configure the new point and click S a v e .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 71
Points
Figure 43. Create point page (analog point shown)
System-defined Points
You can access system-defined points as follows:
Click the D e t a i l s tab on a s p a c e s , e q u i p m e n t , or s y s t e m s page. A table contains system-
defined points appears (see the following figure).
N o t e : The points in black type in the name column are internal equipment properties, for
monitoring only. They cannot be changed.
72 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Points
Figure 44. Point details page
Point Overrides
An override refers to the action of a user taking control of a point rather than allowing the system
to control it. Point values can be overridden for output and value points by users who have been
assigned a priority level that gives them override capability. Priority levels of 1–16 exist, with 1
being the highest. The following four priority levels have been pre-assigned for user overrides:
• 1: Life Safety - Manual
• 8: Manual Override High
• 11: Manual Override Medium
• 13: Manual Override Low (the default for user overrides)
A user with a priority level higher than 13 has advanced override capability.
Overrides take place based on a user’s priority level. If a user with a higher priority level has
performed an override, an override entered by a user with a lower priority level will not take
effect until the entry by the higher priority user clears.
Points appearing with the following icon on their right can be overridden: .
A point that has been overridden appears with the following icon:
• A user override exists:
• A temporary user override exists:
Performing Simple Overrides

The simple override feature uses a priority level of 13 —Manual Override Low.
To perform a simple override of an output or value point:
1. Begin at one of the following pages:
• For a point, begin at the page containing the list of points of that type.
• For the occupancy mode of a point, begin at the status page for the specific equipment.
• For a space or equipment setpoint, begin at the status page for the specific equipment,
then click the c o n f i g u r e button to open the C o n f i g u r a t i o n page.
2. Select the override icon ( ) to the right of the point. The simple override page appears.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 73
Points
Select or enter a point value, with or without an expiration time.

3. Click S a v e .
On the Tracer SC user interface, points that can be overridden, or have existing user overrides
show one of the icons displayed in the following table.
Override Icon Override Icon Description
Indicates that the point can be overridden
Indicates that a user override is in effect
Indicates that a temporary user override is in effect and will expire at a designated time.
Performing Advanced Overrides

The advanced override feature allows the user to:
• See the current override priority
• See all priority levels controlling the point
– Priority levels of 1 through 16 are available, with 1 being the highest.
– The maximum priority level is specified by the role that is assigned to a user.
– The simple override feature uses a priority level of 13 —Manual Override Low.
• Release an existing override at a selected priority level
• Set a priority level and a point value, with or without an expiration time
To perform an advanced override of an output or value point:
1. Begin at one of the following pages:
74 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Points
• The page containing the list of points of the type you want to override; for example, the
A n a l o g I n p u t P o i n t s list page.
• For the occupancy mode of a point, begin at the status page for the specific space or
equipment.
For a space or equipment setpoint, begin at the status page for the specific space or
equipment and then click the c o n f i g u r e button to open the C o n f i g u r a t i o n page.
2. Select the override icon ( ) to the right of the point. The simple override page appears.
3. Select m o r e o p t i o n s . The advanced override page appears in which the following options
appear:
• Select the override priority level, and then select or enter a point value.
• Release control of an existing override by selecting its priority level from the drop-down
list and then selecting r e l e a s e c o n t r o l . (There must be an override at the selected priority
level for the release control option to appear.)
4. Click A p p l y .
Point Service
Points can be put in or out of service. Points are put out of service typically for testing purposes.
• I n p u t p o i n t s : When input points are out of service, they no longer update their value based
on the referenced property. Instead, the user must enter the point value.
• O u t p u t p o i n t s : When output points are out of service, they no longer control the value
(reference).
• V a l u e p o i n t s : When value points are out of service, they no longer respond to automated
control (TGP programming or application control).
N o t e : For equipment using a Tracer UC400, set the point service from the equipment
configuration page.
Placing Points In or Out of Service

To place a point in or out of service:
1. Click on the name of the point. A status page for that point will appear. (For system-defined
points, click on the Details tab for a points list.)
2. On the point status page, select the P o i n t S e r v i c e drop-down list.
3. Make your selection and then click S a v e .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 75
Points
Figure 45. Placing a point in or out of service
Space Temperature Setpoints

A temperature setpoint can be communicated to a unit controller in three ways:
• From the Tracer system
• From the sensor thumbwheel
• From the values stored in the unit controller
This section explains how to determine the source of the space temperature setpoint and how to
change the setpoint source for VAV boxes.
Determining the Space Temperature Setpoint Source

The space temperature setpoint source for a unit is determined by the following two points:
• Space Temperature Setpoint BAS
• Space Temperature Setpoint Use Local
If Space Temperature Setpoint BAS is in service, the unit uses the setpoint sent from the Tracer®
SC. If the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS is out of service, the unit uses either the thumbwheel
or its locally stored setpoint; the decision is based on the following conditions:
• If the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS is out of service and Space Temperature Setpoint Use
local is enabled, the unit uses the thumbwheel.
• If the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS is out of service and Space Temperature Setpoint Use
local is disabled, the unit uses the locally stored setpoints for control.
Source of control Space Temperature Setpoint BAS Space Temperature Setpoint Use Local
Tracer SC In service N/A
Thumbwheel Out of service Enabled
Stored setpoints Out of service Disabled
Changing the Temperature Setpoint Control for VAV Boxes

The method of changing the setpoint control depends on how the VAV box is receiving the
76 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Points
temperature setpoint.
Tracer System Control

If the Space Temperature BAS is out of service (the temperature setpoint value is controlled by a
thumbwheel or a locally stored setpoint), you can change the control to the Tracer system as
follows:
1. From the S p a c e s page, click on the appropriate VAV box. The VAV box status page opens.
2. Click on S p a c e T e m p e r a t u r e S e t p o i n t B A S , which opens the associated point status page.
3. From the P o i n t S e r v i c e drop-down list, select i n s e r v i c e and then click S a v e .
4. The VAV box will now use the value communicated by the Tracer system to calculate its
active setpoint:
• If the VAV box is in heating and occupied mode, the active setpoint is the Space
Temperature Setpoint BAS – Occupied Offset.
• If the VAV box is in cooling and occupied mode, the active setpoint is the Space
Temperature Setpoint BAS + Occupied Offset.
Thumbwheel Control
If the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS is in service (that is, if the temperature setpoint value is
controlled by the Tracer system), you can change the control to the thumbwheel as follows:
1. From the S p a c e s page, click on the appropriate VAV box, which open the associated status
page.
2. Click on the S p a c e T e m p e r a t u r e S e t p o i n t B A S point, which opens the associated status
page.
3. From the P o i n t S e r v i c e drop-down list, select O u t o f S e r v i c e and then click S a v e . This
action removes the control of the setpoint from the Tracer system.
4. Return to the S p a c e s page and click to highlight the equipment for which you just changed
the point service.
5. From the A c t i o n s button,, select E n a b l e L o c a l S e t p o i n t and then click s a v e .
The VAV box will now use the value communicated by the thumbwheel to calculate its active
setpoint.
N o t e : If thumbwheel control fails, the controller will revert to the locally stored setpoint.
Locally Stored Setpoint Control

If If Space Temperature BAS is enabled (that is, if the temperature setpoint is controlled by the
Tracer system or the thumbwheel), you can change control of the setpoint to its locally stored
value as follows:
1. From the S p a c e s page, click on the appropriate VAV box, which open the associated status
page.
2. Click on the S p a c e T e m p e r a t u r e S e t p o i n t B A S point, which opens the associated status
page.
3. From the P o i n t S e r v i c e drop-down list, select O u t o f S e r v i c e and then click S a v e . This
action removes the control of the setpoint from the Tracer system.
4. Return to the S p a c e s page and click to highlight the equipment for which you just changed
the point service.
5. From the A c t i o n s button, select D i s a b l e L o c a l S e t p o i n t and then click S a v e .
The VAV box will now use its locally stored temperature setpoint to calculate its active
setpoint.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 77
Schedules
Scheduling for Tracer SC is based on the BACnet schedule object implementation. Scheduling is
one of a facility’s most important energy-saving strategies. It ensures that equipment runs only
when needed. Scheduling facilitates the following tasks:
• Creating, editing, and deleting schedules
• Creating, editing, and deleting calendars and exception schedules
• Viewing all effective schedules in a facility
The Schedules page contains four tabs: Active Schedules, All Schedules, All Exceptions, and All
Calendars.
Figure 46. All Schedules (Active Schedules shown)
Optimal Start/Stop
Optimal start and stop times can be defined for HVAC schedules. HVAC refers to both Area and
equipment.
The schedule coordinates with the Area application or equipment to calculate when the optimal
start and stop occurs. Optimal start/stop times are based on outside air conditions, space
temperature, and occupied setpoints.
Exceptions and Calendars

Exceptions are temporary modifications to a schedule. Exceptions contain one set of dates or
one repeating pattern of dates. If a schedule has an exception applied, a red box outline will
appear.
Calendars
For multiple dates and repeating patterns a calendar can be created, which is then applied to the
exception.
78 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Schedules
Calendars are used to group dates, which can then have exceptions applied to these dates on a
schedule. For example, a school might create a calendar to group the days that require extended
operating hours for after-school meetings.
Release Function
The release function is a predetermined time in which the present schedule or the event releases
control over to the next event based on priority. Conceptually, a scheduled release is very similar
to a timed override. For example, after the daily schedule ends at 12:00 am (midnight), the
schedule releases control over to the next event.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 79
Reports
You can generate the following types of reports for Trane equipment:
• Site reports
• VAS commissioning reports
• Points reports
Report features include:
• Scheduling reports to run during specific date periods and run frequencies
• Specifying file storage options for scheduled reports
• Exporting reports to save to your PC as CSV, HTML, or PDF files
• Editing scheduled reports
Figure 47. Reports page
Creating a New Report

Reports can be created to run manually, or you can create a scheduled report. Either way, the
new report is stored as a saved report after it is run. The following instructions describe how to
create a new scheduled report.
1. From the R e p o r t s page, click on the n e w r e p o r t button. The N e w R e p o r t – S e l e c t R e p o r t
T y p e page opens.
2. Select a report from the R e p o r t D e f i n i t i o n C a t e g o r y drop-down list. The type of reports,
based on your selection, will appear in the table directly below.
3. Select a report type from the table, and then select s c h e d u l e from the A c t i o n s button. The
S c h e d u l e R e p o r t – S e l e c t I t e m s page opens.
4. Select items listed in the table that you want included in the new report.
5. Click N e x t . The S c h e d u l e R e p o r t – O p t i o n s page opens.
6. Select a F i l e S t o r a g e O p t i o n :
a. O v e r w r i t e p r e v i o u s f i l e o f s a m e s c h e d u l e d r e p o r t — select this option to overwrite the
previously saved file with the new one. Data in the previously run report cannot be
recovered from the system. The file name is based on the report title.
b. C r e a t e u n i q u e f i l e n a m e b y a d d i n g a s e q u e n c e n u m b e r e a c h t i m e t h e r e p o r t i s r u n —
80 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Reports
select this option to save the report after each run by adding a sequence number to the
file name. This results in multiple saved reports. For example, "East Wing Chiller 2, East
Wing Chiller 3, and East Wing Chiller 4.”
7. Select R e p o r t D a t e ( s ) options:
a. Select a recurrence pattern: single date, daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly.
b. Select one or more days of the week that it will recur.
c. Select a start date (End date is optional).
d. Select the time of day that the report will run.
8. Click N e x t . The S c h e d u l e S u m m a r y page opens. To confirm your selections, click F i n i s h .
Exporting a Report
When you export a saved report, it is saved locally to your computer (PC) or an external device
into a format of your choice.
1. From the Reports page select a saved report to view (Saved Reports tab). The selected report
page opens.
2. Select e x p o r t a s from the A c t i o n s button. Format choices are HTML, PDF, and CSV. If CSV
format is selected, the E x p o r t R e p o r t dialog box appears: Click export to save the report.
Select a location to save the report, then click save.
3. If PDF or HTML formats were selected, export (save) the report to your PC other external
storage device.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 81
The Tools Menu
To effectively manage your Tracer® SC, a selection of task-based tools are available. The
following tools described in this section are accessible from the Tools page:
• Backup and Restore
• Custom Graphics
• Global Referencers
• Programs
• Custom Equipment Keys
• Key Conversions
• Equipment Templates
• System Logs
• Tracer Ensemble IP Address
• Resource Usage
• BACnet Information
Figure 48. Tools menu
Backup and Restore

From the left navigation menu click T o o l s > B a c k u p a n d R e s t o r e . Backup and Restore is a
process that involves creating an exact duplication of a Tracer® SC, exporting (saving) the
duplicated copy, and then restoring that copy at a later time. Use the Restore tool to restore the
Tracer SC system configuration file that was produced by the backup tool.
It is important to back up Tracer SCs in the event that a system failure occurs. Backups should
also be performed prior to upgrading software, adding devices, or adding new applications.
Follow best practices when implementing a backup and restore procedure plan for your system.
Backups do not include license files.
I m p o r t a n t : If an SD card has been installed in the Tracer SC, it will store the backup on the SD
card rather than its internal memory. The SD card must support SDHC. SDHC has a
maximum size of 32 GB. SD cards that exceed 32 GB will not work.
82 BAS-SVX31U-EN
The Tools Menu
Custom Graphics
You can use custom graphics in the Tracer® SC user interface to view and navigate through the
building automation system. Custom graphics can be used as your home page, as status pages,
and can be associated with the customized navigation tree.
Custom graphics can display data related to building environments, such as climate, lighting,
and other controllable operations, and can be used to change setpoints and override equipment
operation.
Creating Custom Graphics
Use the Tracer Graphic Editor (TGE) to create custom graphics. For instructions on creating
custom graphics, see the Tracer Graphics Editor Applications Guide (BAS-APG020).
N o t e : TGE is a component of the Tracer TU service tool and is launched from a Tracer TU menu
item. To obtain the Tracer TU installation file, go to the Service Technicians page on the
Trane portal. See the Tracer TU Service Tool Getting Started Guide (TTU-SVN01) for
reference.
Deleting Custom Graphics from Tracer SC
On the C u s t o m G r a p h i c s page, select the graphic(s) you want to delete. From the A c t i o n s
button, select D e l e t e .
Setting Up User Access for Custom Graphics

An administrator must set up access privileges individually for each user, to enable users to have
access to graphics.
After an administrator has assigned graphics access privileges to a user the user can:
• Choose a graphic as a home page
• View status pages graphically
• Choose to have the navigation tree open automatically upon log in or to remain closed until
the user opens it
To set up graphics access privileges:
1. Select A d m i n . . . in the global navigation bar of any Tracer® SC page.
2. Select U s e r s from the drop-down list. The U s e r s list page appears.
Figure 49. Users page
BAS-SVX31U-EN 83
The Tools Menu
3. Select the check box to the left of the name of the user you are setting up. Then, from the
A c t i o n s button, select V i e w . Information for the selected user is displayed, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 50. Individual user’s page
4. Click the E d i t button. In the C u s t o m G r a p h i c s A c c e s s section of the page, select the check
boxes to the left of the graphics that you want the user to be able to access.
5. Click S a v e .
Editing User Preferences

Users can choose the where and how graphics are displayed on the Tracer® SC user interface.
These are initially set up by the administrator.
1. Select U s e r . . . in the global navigation bar of any Tracer SC page.
2. Select p r e f e r e n c e s from the drop-down list. The U s e r s P r e f e r e n c e s page appears.
3. Graphics-related preferences are in the General Preferences section.
4. To edit preferences, click the E d i t button and make selections.
5. Click S a v e .
Global Referencers
A global reference is a connection that is made between a data point in the Tracer® SC and one
or more systems that are configured to respond to the value of the data point. A global reference
is made up of one trigger and one or more targets. It allows you to read a piece of data from one
place and then send to one or more places. Global references can be made to a point in the
Tracer SC or to external points of BACnet MS/TP equipment.
From the left navigation menu click T o o l s > G l o b a l R e f e r e n c e r s . The Global Referencers list
page serves as a starting point for additional options.
Beginning with version 4.3, passing data from one Tracer SC to another has been simplified
when creating a global referencer as described below:
84 BAS-SVX31U-EN
The Tools Menu
1. Click C r e a t e G l o b a l R e f e r e n c e r . The C r e a t e G l o b a l R e f e r e n c e r — S e l e c t S o u r c e dialog

box opens.
2. Click S h o w o t h e r S C s o n t h e n e t w o r k , which populates the S e l e c t S o u r c e window with the
other Tracer SCs.
3. From there, select the equipment or point for reference.
4. Click N e x t to continue.
Figure 51. Create global referencer — show other SC+s on network
Programs
Tracer Graphical Programming (TGP2) programs are created and downloaded to the Tracer® SC
by using the Tracer TU service tool. To view the status of programs after they have been
downloaded to the Tracer SC, select T o o l s > P r o g r a m s from the left navigation menu. The
P r o g r a m s list page shows the how often programs in the Tracer SC run and the most recent run
time.
Custom TGP2 routines for installed equipment can now be viewed in real-time. Data points in the
routine will reflect present value and gets updated for every 15 seconds.
N o t e : See the Tracer TU Service Tool Getting Started Guide (TTU-SVN01).
Custom Equipment Keys

You can create equipment keys during the device discovery process if a predefined equipment
key is not available.
Mapping points to Tracer® SC keys makes communication between controllers and the Tracer
SC possible. Each key is a predefined data object recognized by Tracer SC. For example, the key
“Space Temperature Setpoint Active" can be used by both the BACnet UC400 (with the BACnet
object of the same name) and the LonTalk VV550 (nvoSpace Temp).
From the left navigation menu click T o o l s > C u s t o m E q u i p m e n t K e y s . Click on a key name to
view details.
To edit an equipment key, select a key to view from the Custom Equipment Keys page and then
click edit.
Key Conversion
The Key Conversion page displays both custom and factory key conversions. Select a tab to view
either Custom of Factory.
Custom key conversions:
• Custom key conversions are displayed with the type, the key, and whether the key conversion
is in use.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 85
The Tools Menu
• To view details of a custom key conversion, click on the name; the K e y C o n v e r s i o n D e t a i l s

page opens.
• Delete or export custom key conversions, by selecting one or more and then making a
selection from the Actions button.
• To import a new custom key conversion, click the Import button.
Factory key conversions:
• Factory key conversions are displayed with the type, the key, and whether the key conversion
is in use.
• To view details of a factory key conversion, click on the name; the K e y C o n v e r s i o n D e t a i l s
page opens.
Equipment Templates
Equipment templates are used when installing devices onto the Tracer SC. Some equipment
templates are pre-defined, others are created based on the device that is being installed.
From the left navigation menu click T o o l s > E q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e s . Click on an equipment
template name to view details.
To edit an equipment template, select a template from the Equipment Templates page and then
click edit.
System Logs
System logs that are currently on the system are available for viewing or exporting. System logs
can be the standard “hydra” log files (hydra.log, hydra.log.0, hydra.log.1, hydra.log.2, hydra.
log.3, hydra.log.4), any stack dump log files (stackdump.log.x), or any additional log files that
may be generated by a Tracer SC application and/or process.
From the left navigation menu click T o o l s > S y s t e m L o g s .
Tracer Ensemble IP Address

This tool only applies to facilities with Tracer Ensemble installed. You can view and edit the
Tracer Ensemble IP address for Direct Linking. To access, select T o o l s > T r a c e r E n s e m b l e I P
A d d r e s s from the left navigation menu.
Resource Usage
Resource Usage displays system usage among applications, memory, and points. This is
primarily used by Trane Technical support.
BACnet Information
Information about BACnet configurations is shown on this page. This information is typically
used by Trane Technical Support.
86 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Connecting a Tracer SC to a Building Network
Today, most business systems use Internet Protocol (IP) networks. A Tracer® building
automation system can exist on an IP network along with the other business systems. An IP
network allows all applications on the network to be accessed from a single PC. All networks
referred to in this guide are IP networks. A single IP network can exist in a single building or can
connect a group of buildings separated by several feet or hundreds of miles. An IP network that is
confined to a single building or group of buildings is referred to as a local area networks (LAN).
LANs can be connected together over any distance by using telephone lines and radio waves. A
system of LANs connected in this way is called a wide area network (WAN).
Network Pre-installation
Before installing a Tracer SC on a network, determine if the network will be used on one or more
Tracer SCs and if the network will be divided into subnets. Meet with the customer’s IT staff to
discuss where the Tracer SCs are to be located and to obtain required information and
equipment.
Single and Multiple Tracer SC Facilities

The following figure shows a multi-Tracer SC facility. Two Tracer SCs are connected to a PC by
an Ethernet switch. The Tracer SC on the left still has its IP address. The Tracer SC on the right
has had its IP address changed so that it is unique. The PC has the recommended IP address.
Figure 52. Multiple Tracer SCs connected through an Ethernet switch
IP address IP address changed

192.168.1.10 to provide unique
number
192.168.1.12
Tracer SCs connected

at Ethernet port 1
Recommended
IP address for PC
192.168.1.100
Ethernet switch
Networks with Multiple Subnets

Large complex networks are often divided into segments called subnets. It is crucial to involve
the customer’s IT staff in setting up such networks.
Subnets make network communication more efficient. A typical subnet might consist of, for
example, all the equipment at one geographic location, in one building, or on a single LAN (if the
network is a WAN).
A router separates a network into subnets and controls excessive network traffic which can slow
network performance. Some broadcast messages (messages that are sent to all devices on an
entire network) are not needed by all devices. Devices on the same subnet have IP and gateway
addresses with a common IP routing prefix. The router manages communication between the
subnets by using the gateway addresses to determine which messages pass from one subnet to
another.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 87
Figure 53. Networks with multiple subnets
Service laptop/PC
Ethernet switch
Examples of addresses
provided by IT staff
Tracer SC-1st floor: Tracer SC-2nd floor:

IP address
176.48.0.4 176.48.0.3
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
176.48.10.1 176.48.10.1
Gateway address
Tracer SC-3rd floor:
240.50.1.2
255.255.255.0 Router
240.50.1.1
Network Installation
The following information and equipment is required or optional, as stated, for installing Tracer®
SC on a building network.
N o t e : A memo is available for communicating with the customer’s IT staff about the information
that must be obtained from them for network installation.
Obtaining the IP Address

A unique IP address is required for each Tracer SC for all networks. Tracer SCs can use either:
• A permanently assigned (static) IP address, or
• An address that is sent from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The DHCP
server must be set up to send the Tracer SC the same reserved IP address each time the
Tracer SC connects to the DHCP server.
You can obtain IP addresses from the customer’s IT staff.
To edit the IP address of a Tracer SC:
1. Select Identification and Communications from the Installation page, then select the IP
Configuration tab.
2. Click E d i t . To edit the network address for one or both Ethernet Network ports, select one of
the following options:
• O b t a i n I P a d d r e s s a u t o m a t i c a l l y u s i n g D H C P . A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) requests an IP address from a server.
• U s e t h e f o l l o w i n g I P a d d r e s s . Enter an IP address in the provided fields.
88 BAS-SVX31U-EN
3. Click S a v e .
Routing
Routing is the process of selecting paths in a network to send network traffic. Use network
routing for Trane Intelligent Services (TIS) applications or in any case where the BAS network
must be separated from the Internet.
To select network routing:
1. Use the check boxes to select one or more network addresses.
2. Click the actions button to edit or delete the address.
3. Click S a v e . OR add a network route by clicking the add route button. The a d d r o u t e dialog
box appears.
4. Enter the required information in the fields, then click S a v e .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 89
Figure 54. Editing IP configuration
DHCP
If the network uses the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), DHCP server must be set up
to send the Tracer SC (unless it is a BBMD) the same reserved IP address each time the Tracer SC
connects to the DHCP server. If the Tracer SC is a BBMD, the IP address must be fixed.
DNS Server
Domain Name System (DNS) is an Internet service that translates domain names into IP
addresses. It may be necessary to configure the DNS server for network routing. Use network
routing for Trane Intelligent Services (TIS) applications or in any case where the BAS network
must be separated from the Internet.
To manually configure the DNS server:
90 BAS-SVX31U-EN
1. From the left navigation menu, click I n s t a l l a t i o n > I d e n t i f i c a t i o n a n d C o m m u n i c a t i o n s > I P

Configuration.
2. Click E d i t .
3. In the D N S S e t u p section, select the U s e t h e f o l l o w i n g D N S s e r v e r a d d r e s s e s radio button.
4. Enter the DNS server addresses for Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary (where applicable).
5. Click S a v e .
Figure 55. DNS setup
Jacks and Cabling

Required for connecting the network. (Obtain from IT staff).
Gateway Address
Required for all networks. The gateway address allows traffic to be routed between the Internet
and an internal network. (Obtain from IT staff.)
MAC Address
Required for all networks. A media access control (MAC) address — also called a physical
address — is a unique number assigned by the manufacturer for identification. The IT staff at the
customer site will request that you provide the MAC address of any Tracer SC that is to be
installed on the building network. The MAC address can be found in the IP configuration section
of the Tracer SC user interface.
You can also obtain the MAC address by doing the following:
1. Select S t a r t > R u n .
2. In Run, type c o m m a n d . A DOS screen opens and presents a prompt.
3. At the prompt, type p i n g followed by a space and then the IP address. Click Enter.
4. At the next prompt, type a r p - a . Click Enter.
The response contains the MAC address below the heading, “Physical Address.”
Ethernet Switch
An Ethernet switch is an optional device used to connect multiple Tracer SCs on the same facility
for convenience and as a way of optimizing network traffic. Use Ethernet port 1 to connect
multiple Tracer SCs individually to the Ethernet switch.
Router
Required to separate a network into subnets to manage network traffic.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 91
Subnet Mask
Required for subnets. A subnet mask is a number used for routing traffic to a particular subnet.
The subnet mask is stored in the PC, server, or router and is matched up with the incoming IP
address to determine whether to accept or reject a packet. (Obtain from IT staff.)
Securing Your Network with VPN

Trane recommends the use of a Virtual Private Network (VPN) to provide extra security to your
BAS. VPN is a mechanism that safely extends a private network across a public network such as
the Internet.
VPN provides an additional layer of security to your BAS without comprising your ability to
access Tracer SC remotely. A VPN can help to prevent Internet based attacks on your BAS by
requiring an additional layer of authentication. This method requires a VPN server and VPN client
software to be set up by the customer’s IT staff.
Frequently Asked Questions about VPN
My facility already uses SSL; do I still need to use a VPN?
The use of a VPN is still recommended as an additional layer of security. Attacks can come from
both inside and outside of your network.
After I set up a VPN, do I still need to use SSL?
Yes. A VPN only provides encryption between the VPN endpoints (the VPN client and server).
Traffic from the VPN endpoint to and from the server is not encrypted unless SSL is used.
Do I still need a firewall?
Yes. Firewall rules should be set up to restrict Internet access to the VPN port only. Consider
setting up rules with the VPN server to restrict VPN access to only the required IP addresses and
port.
What is the impact of VPN on my system performance?
Impact to performance should be minimal.
92 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Figure 56. Remote access to a Tracer SC by port forwarding through a firewall or VPN
Service laptop/PC
Ethernet switch
Remote devices
Tracer SC - 1st floor Tracer SC - 2nd floor
Firewall
Router
Tracer SC - 3rd floor office

Internet/Intranet
BAS-SVX31U-EN 93
Ethernet Network Wiring
Ethernet network requirements are described in this section.
Network Wiring Specifications

Trane requires Cat5, 5e, or 6 cable for Ethernet network wiring.
The Ethernet port on Tracer® SC supports only twisted-pair wire (10BaseT or 100BaseT) with
RJ45 connectors. With twisted-pair wiring, one pair is used to receive data signals and the other
pair is used to transmit data signals.
If a direct connection between two devices is required, use a straight-through or crossover cable.
If multiple devices are required to communicate, use an Ethernet switch.
The EIA/TIA cabling standard recommends a maximum segment length of 295 ft (90 m) between
the wire termination equipment in the wiring closet and the wall plate in the office. This
recommendation provides 33 ft (10 m) of cable allowance to accommodate patch cables at each
end of the link and signal losses in intermediate wire terminations on the link.
N o t e : Cable installations must comply with both federal and local codes. Plenum-rated cable is
available to meet NEC Article 725, which addresses flame resistance and smoke emission
for signal cables
Due to the high precision required when performing twisted-pair wire terminations, Trane
recommends that only qualified technicians with the proper equipment handle all
terminations and splicing.
Wire type Maximum total wire length (a) Minimum distance between two devices
10BaseT or 100BaseT 328 ft (100 m) 1.64 ft (0.5 m)

(a) You can increase distances and the number of devices by using an Ethernet switch.
Fiber-Optic Cable Recommendations

Fiber-optic cable can be used for networks involving long distances, inter-building cabling, and
areas with a potential for electrical noise. Fiber optic signals are less susceptible to electrical
noise, including lightning, EMI/RFI, voltage conductors, and ground loops.
Fiber-Optic Cable
Trane requires duplex, 62.5 mm core glass fiber-optic cable with ST connectors, which comes in
a variety of types for specific applications, such as indoor, outdoor, burial, aerial, and duct. You
can order fiber-optic cable, fiber-optic modems, ST-type crimp connectors, epoxy connectors,
and other accessories from Trane Buying Group suppliers.
I m p o r t a n t : Trane recommends that only qualified and experienced fiber-optic technicians
prepare the fiber-optic end connectors and cable run lengths. Improper methods may
result in faulty communication due to signal degradation (decibel loss), which must
be less than 14 dB on each fiber.
Fiber-Optic Media Converter

Fiber-optic media converters converts the electrical signals from a twisted pair of wires to optical
signals, which are sent over the fiber-optic cable. Trane supports the following fiber-optic media
converters:
• Connect Air Int. W4869 for connecting fiber-optic cable to 10BaseT wire.
• Allied Telesyn AT-MC101 XL for connecting fiber-optic cable to 100BaseT wire
The following figure shows a port for a fiber-optic cable (TX and RX) and a 10BaseT port for
connecting the media converter to the Tracer SC. At the other end is a 12 Vdc port to connect
power to the media converter.
94 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Figure 57. Fiber-optic media converter for 10BaseT wire (connect Air Int. W4869)
10BaseT port
Power (12 Vdc)
RX
Fiber-optic cable
TX
To wire a fiber-optic media converter on an inter-building network, follow these procedures (refer
to the following figure):
1. In Building A, connect the power supply to the 12 Vdc port on media converter A1.
2. Connect the 10BaseT cable from the Tracer SC to the 10BaseT port on media converter A1.
3. Connect the terminated fibers to the fiber optic TX-RX connections on media converter A1.
4. In Building B, connect the power supply to the 12 Vdc port on media converter B1.
5. Connect the fiber-optic cables from media converter A1 to the TX-RX connections on media
converter B1, observing reversed polarity.
6. If only one Tracer SC exists on the network in Building B, connect 10BaseT cable from the
Tracer SC to the 10BaseT port on media converter B1 to complete the fiber-optic network
between Buildings A and B.
a. If multiple Tracer SCs exist within the building, connect 10BaseT cable from media
converter B1 to a hub that connects the Tracer SCs.
b. If another fiber connection is desired (as shown in the following figure), connect 10BaseT
cable from media converter B1 to a hub that connects the Tracer SC(s), and connect
10BaseT cable from the hub to another media converter (B2).
7. Connect the power supply to the 12 Vdc port on media converter B2.
8. Connect terminated fiber-optic cables to the TX-RX connection on media converter B2.
9. Add a media converter (C1) in Building C. Connect the power supply to its 12 Vdc port.
10. Connect terminated fiber-optic cables from media converter B2 to the TX-RX connection on
media converter C1, observing reversed polarity.
11. If only one Tracer SC exists on the network in Building C, connect 10BaseT cable from the
Tracer SC to the 10BaseT port on media converter C1 to complete the fiber-optic network for
Buildings A, B, and C.
a. If multiple Tracer SCs exist within the building, connect 10BaseT cable from media
converter C1 to a hub that connects the Tracer SCs.
b. If another fiber connection is desired, connect 10BaseT cable from media converter C1 to
a hub that connects the Tracer SC(s), and connect 10BaseT cable from the hub to another
media converter.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 95
Figure 58. Example of inter-building fiber-optic cabling for an IP network
Building A
Tracer SC
Unit Controllers
10BaseT
A1
W4869
Fiber-optic cable
Building C
B2
B1
Building B
W4869 W4869
W4869
10BaseT
Switch
10BaseT
Unit controllers Tracer SC
Tracer SC
96 BAS-SVX31U-EN
BACnet Network Communication
BACnet communication must be configured for Tracer® SCs. For communication between Tracer
SCs, BACnet IP addressing is used. For communication with unit controllers on a twisted-pair
communication link, the BACnet MS/TP protocol is used. Review your network configurations to
determine whether or not Tracer SCs are able to communicate with each other. Depending on
how your network is configured, BBMDs may not be required. See for examples.
BBMDs
BBMDs are required for subnets. To ensure that messages are routed properly through the
network, one controller on each subnet must be assigned as the BBMD for that subnet. BBMDs
are assigned during configuration of the Tracer SC.
A subnet’s local BBMD enables the passing of a BACnet message from one subnet to the next by
repackaging it as a directed message (a message that is intended for specific devices), and then
sending it to each remote BBMD on its broadcast distribution table (BDT). The subnet’s local
BBMD then rebroadcasts the message to the devices on its subnet. A Tracer SC that is a BBMDs
must have a fixed IP address.
BDTs
BDTs are required for subnets. A broadcast distribution table (BDT) is essential for routing
broadcast messages. It is created during Tracer SC configuration. A BDT contains the IP address
for each BBMD on the network. An identical BDT must be downloaded to each BBMD on a site,
which is facilitated by the BDT editor in the Tracer SC
UDP Port
UDP ports are always required for BACnet IP, even if there is only one subnet. The User
Datagram Protocol (UDP) is an Internet protocol used for BACnet device communication. The
default UDP port number is 47808, and can be changed in the SC configuration section. Refer to
the following two figures for examples.
Figure 59. Example of a facility that does not require BBMDs (single subnet)
One subnet: 192.168.1.0 Router
Tracer SC-3
Tracer SC-1
IP address: IP address:
192.168.1.101 Tracer SC-2 192.168.1.103
IP address:
192.168.1.102
Some facilities do require a BBMD if they are configured with more than one subnet as shown in
the following figure.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 97
Figure 60. Example of a facility that requires BBMDs (multiple subnets)
Tracer SC-5 Subnet: 192.168.2.0
IP address: 192.168.2.101
Tracer SC-6
Tracer SC-4
IP address: 192.168.102
IP address: 192.168.2.100
Router
Tracer SC-3
Tracer SC-1
IP address: 192.168.1.100 IP address: 192.168.1.102

Tracer SC-2
IP address: 192.168.1.101
Multi-Tracer SC Facilities
Multi-SC facilities provide improved performance and job layout options, particularly in large
facilities such as college campuses. A multi-SC facility consists of one Tracer® SC with an
application license (SC-App) and controls all applications (schedules, systems, reports and so
forth), and one or more Tracer SCs with a base license (SC-Base) that serve as BACnet routers.
With this layout, a Tracer SC installation can utilize:
• One or more MS/TP links with 60 devices on each link
• A variety of customized configurations
The following table shows both single SC and multi-SC support for various protocols
Communication Type Single SC Multi SC
Air-Fi® Wireless Up to 120 devices Up to 240 devices
BACnet MS/TP Up to 120 devices Up to 240 devices
BACnet IP Up to 240 devices Up to 240 devices
COMM 3/4 Up to 240 devices Up to 240 devices
LON Up to 120 devices N/A
Modbus TCP Up to 60 devices Up to 120 devices
Modbus RTU Up to 60 devices Up to 120 devices
N o t e : Trane Air-Fi sensors do not count against the device limits listed above. For more
information, see the Air-Fi Wireless System IOM Manual, (BAS-SVX40).
98 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Figure 61. Example of a multi-SC facility
Multi-SC communication also allows for increased integration options with non-Trane BACnet
systems. The following figure illustrates a sample facility layout with an additional Tracer SC that
serves as a base module and non-Trane devices with slower baud rates.
N o t e : Please contact Trane Product Support in St. Paul to assist with implementation and
provide up-to-date support.
Figure 62. Example layout with non-Trane devices and slower baud rates
BAS-SVX31U-EN 99
The following figure illustrates how LonTalk devices must be physically connected to the Tracer
SC-App. BACnet unit controllers can be physically connected to any Tracer SC.
Figure 63. Example layout with LonTalk and wireless devices
IP
SC-App SC-Base
Wireless
Wireless
MSTP LON
or Modbus MSTP
or Modbus
Setting Up BACnet Communication for Multiple Tracer SCs

To set up BACnet communication:
1. Determine how your Tracer® SCs are configured on the BACnet network. If there is more than
one subnet, a BBMD is required on each subnet.
2. Record the IP addresses for all Tracer SCs and subnet masks; save for a later step.
3. Navigate to the Identification and Communications section of the Tracer SC Installation page,
then expand the BACnet Configuration section.
4. Ensure that the “This Tracer SC is a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)”
checkbox is selected. If not, make the appropriate changes and click s a v e . Navigate back to
the Installation page.
5. In the Define Network section, click BDT Setup, then click the Set up BDT button. The Set Up
BDT page opens as shown in the following figure.
Figure 64. Setting up a BDT
100 BAS-SVX31U-EN
6. Enter the IP address of the other BBMD Tracer SCs into the IP address field. The entries in the
BDT table are BBMDs. If your network requires additional BBMDs, click add BBMD.
I m p o r t a n t : Only one Tracer SC can be set up as a BBMD on a subnet even if multiple Tracer
SCs reside on the same subnet.
7. Click S a v e a n d S e n d .
Sharing Data Between Two Tracer SCs

Sharing Data Using the Pull Method
After setting up BACnet communication, you will need to create points in the Tracer® SCs in
order to share data between Tracer SCs. There are two methods that can be used: the pull
method and the push method.
1. At the Tracer SC user interface, click D e v i c e s from the left navigation menu. The D e v i c e s
page opens.
2. Click on the A p p l i c a t i o n S C tab. Locate and record the device ID; save for a later step.
Figure 65. Locating the device ID
3. Navigate to the D e t a i l s tab of the point that will be referenced from SC-1, and locate the
instance number. Record the instance number for a later step.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 101
Figure 66. Point details page (locating the instance number)
4. At the Tracer SC user interface, click P o i n t s from the left navigation menu. The P o i n t s page
opens.
5. Click the C r e a t e P o i n t button, then select the appropriate point type. In this example, analog
input was selected.
6. Enter the point name and units information in the fields.
7. Click the reference icon . The S e l e c t D a t a S o u r c e dialog box appears.
Figure 67. Select data source dialog box
8. Click S e l e c t e x t e r n a l B A C n e t r e f e r e n c e .
9. Enter the device ID, point type, and instance number that you recorded in an earlier step.
Select v a l u e from the property drop-down list.
10. Click A p p l y to return to the C r e a t e P o i n t page.
11. Set the Update Interval to determine how often data is read.
• An interval of 1 to 5 minutes is recommended for BACnet IP data sharing
– An interval of 5 to 15 minutes is recommended for BACnet MS/TP data sharing
12. Enter any other preferred point data.
13. Click S a v e .
102 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Sharing Data Using the Push Method

Data is pushed from the Tracer SC (SC-1) that has the data, to a point on the Tracer SC (SC-2) that
requires the data. This is done by creating an output point on SC-1 and referencing a value point
on SC-2.
By using this method, the output point can be configured to send the data at a rate that is faster
than the heartbeat interval on the receiving value object. This allows for multiple attempts to be
made at sending the data before the value point enters a fault state.
In the Tracer SC that will receive the data:
1. Locate and record the device ID and the point instance number as described in “Sharing Data
Using the Pull Method.” Save for a later step.
2. At the Tracer SC user interface, click P o i n t s from the left navigation menu. The P o i n t s page
opens.
3. Click the C r e a t e P o i n t button, then select B i n a r y V a l u e .
4. Enter the following information in the fields as shown in the following figure.
• Name – Chilled water request (user specified)
– Heartbeat – enable (to detect communication failures)
– Heartbeat Interval – 15 minutes (recommended range is 30 seconds to 12 hours)
N o t e : The point will enter a fault state if not written to within the heartbeat interval.
This value should be a multiple of the update interval of the point in the source
device (Tracer SC).
5. Enter preferred data in the remaining fields.
Figure 68. Creating a binary value point
6. Click S a v e .
In the Tracer SC that has the data:
1. At the Tracer SC user interface, click t o o l s > G l o b a l R e f e r e n c e r s > c r e a t e g l o b a l
r e f e r e n c e r . The Create Global Referencer dialog box opens.
2. In the Name field, enter Chilled water request from SC 1.
3. Select a priority level. For example, 15 – Application low.
4. In the Update Frequency section, set the Update Interval to determine how often data is read.
For example, 5 minutes. This information is sent to the other Tracer SC every 5 minutes. (This
should be an interval of the heartbeat time of the point created in step 3).
5. In the Source section, click S e l e c t E x t e r n a l B A C n e t S o u r c e .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 103
6. Click the reference icon . The S e l e c t D a t a S o u r c e dialog box appears.

7. Click S e l e c t e x t e r n a l B A C n e t r e f e r e n c e .
8. Enter the device ID, point type, and instance number; select a value from the property drop-
down list.
9. Click A p p l y to return to the C r e a t e P o i n t page.
10. Enter preferred data in remaining fields.
11. Click S a v e .
104 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Unit controllers
Unit controllers provide all necessary unit control functions. They operate associated unitary
equipment, while ensuring that all built-in safety features are enabled and that diagnostics are
issued. Each controller is designed to operate in stand-alone mode. Therefore, if system control
fails, unit operation can continue. Unit controllers installed on a Tracer SC can be a combination
of the following BACnet, LonTalk, Air-Fi wireless, and legacy unit controllers:
BACnet MS/TP Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC

• Tracer UC210 unit controller for variable-air-volume (VAV) equipment
• Tracer UC400 unit controller for programmable equipment
• Tracer UC400 blower coil
• Tracer UC400 Variable Speed Water Source Heat Pump (WSHP)
• Tracer UC400 2 Heat/2 Cool
• Tracer UC400 Fan Coil
• Tracer UC600 programmable unit controller
• Tracer UC800/AdaptiView unit controller for CenTraVac chillers
• BCI-I: BACnet communications interface for IntelliPak system
• BCI-C: BACnet communications interface for chillers
• BCI-R: BACnet communications interface for ReliaTel
• Communicating thermostats for rooftop units, heat pumps, and fan coil applications
• Trane Enercept Flex Power and Energy Meters
• Trane E50 Series Power and Energy Meters
• Non-Trane BACnet MS/TP) devices
BACnet IP Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC

• Tracer UC600 Programmable controller
• Non-Trane BACnet IP devices
Air-Fi Wireless Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC

• Tracer UC600 unit controller for Air Handler (AHU) equipment
LonTalk Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC

• Tracer AH540/541 air-handler controllers
• Tracer MP501 multi-purpose controller
• Tracer MP503 input/output module
• Tracer MP580/581 programmable controller
• Tracer VV550/551 VAV controller
• Tracer ZN510/511 zone controller
• Tracer ZN517 unit controller
• Tracer ZN520/521 zone controller
BAS-SVX31U-EN 105
Unit controllers
• Tracer ZN523 zone controller

• Tracer ZN524 water-source heat pump unit controller
• Tracer ZN525 zone controller
• Tracer CH530 chiller controller
• Tracer CH532 chiller controller
• LCI-C: LonTalk communications interface for chillers
• LCI-I: LonTalk communications interface for IntelliPak systems
• LCI-R: LonTalk communications interface for ReliaTel systems
• LCI-V: LonTalk communications interface for Voyager systems
• Trane TR200 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
• WAGO High Density I/O module (third-party)
• Trane Enercept Flex Power & Energy Meters
• Trane E50 Series Power & Energy Meters
• Non-Trane LonTalk devices using SCC, DAC, and chiller profiles, devices that support LonTalk
standard network generic variables, and devices with Standard Network Variable Types
(SNVTs)
Trane Legacy Unit Controllers (Comm3/4) Supported by Tracer SC

N o t e : The following devices are supported through the use of Legacy Comm Bridge.
• Variable Air Volume (VAV I, II, III, IV)
• IntelliPak
• Voyager
• Commercial Self-Contained (CSC)
• Thermostat Control Module (TCM)
• Programmable Control Module (PCM)
• Universal Programmable Control Module (UPCM)
• Terminal Unit Controller (TUC)
• Centrifugal Chillers (UCP2)
• Helical Rotary Chillers (UCP2)
• CGX Chillers
• Series-R Chillers (RTA/RTW)
Non-Trane Unit controllers Support by Tracer SC

For a list of non-Trane LonTalk, BACnet, and Modbus controllers supported by Tracer SC, visit
the Trane.com Commercial product page at http://www.trane.com/COMMERCIAL/Internal/View.
aspx?i=2757 and open the Tracer SC Integration Capabilities link.
Or, contact St. Paul Trane Product Support for updated procedures to determine the risks
associated with integration to a particular device.
Quantity of Unit Controllers Supported by Tracer SC

Each Tracer SC can support a maximum quantity of 240 unit controllers. Unit controllers installed
on a Tracer SC can be a combination of BACnet and LonTalk unit controllers.
106 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Unit controllers
Notes:
• Scalable 15-device licenses available.
• A maximum of 120 wireless devices are supported in a single Tracer SC facility and
240 in a multiple Tracer SC facility.
• LonTalk devices must be physically installed on the Tracer SC-App.
• BACnet UCs can be physically connected on the Tracer SC-App or a Tracer SC-Base
(maximum of 120 devices).
• Tracer UC600s cannot exceed 10 per MS/TP link or a total of 20 per Tracer SC system.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 107
The BACnet Unit Controller Network
Every BACnet device on a Tracer® building automation system, including unit controllers, must
have a BACnet device ID. Trane BACnet unit controllers use MS/TP communication.
Observe the following best practices when installing, replacing, or adding BACnet devices:
• Equally distribute the number devices between Tracer SC BACnet MS/TP links 1 and 2.
• Sequentially address each BACnet MS/TP link (using the rotary switches), starting at 1, 2, 3,
and so forth. Each BACnet MS/TP should start at address 1.
• Do not leave any gaps when setting addresses.
• Minimize unnecessary communication on the links by setting up event-triggered TGP and
slow sample rates.
N o t e : After you have established communication-link and power wiring for the unit
controllers, you can connect the Tracer TU service tool to a BACnet unit controller and
access any other BACnet unit controller on the link.
Installing Factory-Programmed BACnet Unit Controllers

Trane recommends installing factory-programmed controllers before field-programmable
controllers. Factory-programmed BACnet unit controllers currently include the Tracer® UC400
controller configured for VAV.
N o t e : Follow the wiring procedures given in the BACnet MS/TP Wiring Best Practices
(BAS-SVX051).
To install factory-programmed BACnet unit controllers on the Tracer SC, follow these steps.
1. Mount the unit controller and connect the power supply.
2. Using a small screwdriver, set the rotary switches on the unit controllers. The valid range is
001–127 (000 will prevent BACnet link communication). This setting is used as the BACnet
device ID.
3. Using a USB cable, connect the Tracer TU service tool to the controller.
4. In Tracer TU, on the C o n t r o l l e r S e t t i n g s tab:
• Enter the name (the default is “UC400”).
• In the Protocol section:
– Verify that the device baud rate is set to 76800 bps.
– Verify the BACnet device ID, which was set in step 2.
5. Connect the communication link to the unit controller.
6. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 for each unit controller.
7. Connect the communication link wiring to the Tracer SC.
N o t e : BACnet devices automatically perform a time synchronization daily at 3:00 a.m. If
manually changing the time on the Tracer SC, it may take up to 5 minutes for
synchronization.
Installing Field-Programmable BACnet Unit Controllers

Field-programmable BACnet unit controllers currently include the Tracer UC400 programmable
controller.
(BAS-SVX051).
To install factory-programmed BACnet unit controllers on the Tracer SC, follow these steps in
order:
2. Using a small screwdriver, set the rotary switches on the unit controllers. The valid range is
001–127 (000 will prevent BACnet link communication). This setting is used as the BACnet
108 BAS-SVX31U-EN
The BACnet Unit Controller Network
device ID.
4. In Tracer TU, on the C o n t r o l l e r S e t t i n g s tab:
• Enter the name (the default is “UC400”).
• In the Protocol section:
– Verify that the device baud rate iis set to 76800 bps.
– Verify the BACnet device ID, which was set in step 2.
5. Connect the communication link wiring to the controller.
6. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 for each unit controller.
N o t e : BACnet devices automatically perform a time synchronization daily at 3:00 a.m. If
manually changing the time on the Tracer SC, it may take up to 5 minutes for
synchronization.
Adding BACnet Unit Controllers

N o t e : Follow the wiring procedures provided in the BACnet MS/TP Wiring Best Practices (BAS-
SVX051).
If you need to add a BACnet unit controller to an existing communication link on the Tracer® SC,
follow these steps to ensure that currently installed controllers do not lose communication.
To add BACnet unit controllers:
1. Follow steps 1 through 4 of “Installing Factory-Programmed BACnet Unit Controllers” or
steps 1 through 4 of “Installing Field-Programmable BACnet Unit Controllers.”
2. In Tracer TU, set up application specific settings for a factory-configured controller or TGP2
and point configuration for a field programmable applications.
3. Connect the communication link wiring to the unit controller.
4. To complete the installation on the Tracer SC, select i n s t a l l a t i o n > d e v i c e s . The D e v i c e s
page opens.
5. Click the D i s c o v e r D e v i c e s button, which initiates the device discovery process.
Replacing BACnet Unit Controllers

N o t e : Follow the wiring procedures given in the BACnet MS/TP Wiring Best Practices (BAS-
SVX051).
To replace BACnet unit controllers on the Tracer® SC, follow these steps in order:
1. Mount the new unit controller and connect the power supply.
2. Using a small screwdriver, set the rotary switches to match the settings on the unit controller
that is being replaced.
4. In Tracer TU, configure the controller to be the same as the one you are replacing.
7. To complete the installation on the Tracer SC, navigate to the D e v i c e s page (IIn s t a l l a t i o n >
D e v i c e s ).
8. Select the check box to the left of the device to be replaced. From the actions menu, select
r e p l a c e d e v i c e . A pop-up window appears. Click O K .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 109
The LonTalk Unit Controller Network
Every LonTalk device on a Tracer building automation system, including unit controllers, must
have a valid network address (domain, subnet, node [DSN]). The Tracer® SC does not provide
any type of LonTalk network management function. The Rover™ service tool in Active mode
provides the this function for the LonTalk communication link.
N o t e : After you have established communication-link and power wiring for the LonTalk unit
controllers, you can connect the Rover service tool to a LonTalk unit controller and access
any other LonTalk unit controllers on the link.
Installing Factory-Programmed LonTalk Unit Controllers

Trane recommends installing factory-configured controllers first.
• For MP580/581 controllers configured with a DAC or SCC profile, use the following procedure
(preferred method). All programmed points in the MP580 will be available using the factory
installation method. It is not necessary to create a template for any configuration of the
MP580.
• For MP501 controllers with generic-mode configuration and for all MP503 controllers, refer to
instructions for installing field-programmable LonTalk unit controllers.
(BAS-SVX051).
To install factory-programmed LonTalk unit controllers on Tracer® SC, follow these steps in
order:
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each unit controller.
5. Connect and launch the Rover service tool.
N o t e : For information about using Rover, see the latest version of Rover Service Tool
Installation, Operation, and Programming (EMTX-SVX01).
6. Configure the LonTalk network addresses by using Rover V7 in Active mode to discover the
communication link.
7. Active mode discovery automatically sets up the network by assigning a unique DSN address
to all LonTalk unit controllers and the Tracer SC system controller. Alternatively, other
network management tools can be used to assign a unique DSN for each LonTalk controller.
N o t e : The Tracer SC is given a valid DSN during initial power-up; it does not need to be
present when configuring the LonTalk network on a Trane domain.
8. To complete the installation on the Tracer SC, select the D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y link on the
I n s t a l l a t i o n page of the user interface. The D i s c o v e r D e v i c e s page opens.
N o t e : The Tracer SC installation procedure will not change the DSN.
Installing Field-Programmable LonTalk Unit Controllers

Field-programmable LonTalk unit controllers currently refer to MP501 controllers with generic-
mode configuration and all MP503 controllers.
• For MP580/581 controllers configured with a DAC or SCC profile, use the procedure for
“Installing Factory-Programmed LonTalk Unit Controllers” (preferred method). All
programmed points in the MP580 will be available using the factory installation method. It is
not necessary to create a template for any configuration of the MP580.
• For more specific details about wiring procedures, refer to the BACnet MS/TP Wiring Best
Practices (BAS-SVX051).
To install a field-programmable LonTalk unit controller on the Tracer® SC, follow these steps in
order:
110 BAS-SVX31U-EN

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each unit controller.
5. Connect and launch the Rover service tool. The A c t i v e G r o u p V i e w lists the devices on the
LonTalk link.
N o t e : For information about using Rover, see “Connecting to a Tracer SC Using the LonTalk
Interface Adapter” in the latest version of Rover Service Tool Installation, Operation,
and Programming (EMTX-SVX01).
communication link. (From the Rover main menu, select G r o u p > T o o l M o d e > A c t i v e .)
7. Active mode discovery automatically sets up the network by assigning a unique DSN address
to all LonTalk unit controllers and the Tracer SC system controller. Alternatively, other
network management tools can be used to assign a unique DSN for each LonTalk controller.
N o t e : The Tracer SC is given a valid DSN during initial power-up; it does not need to be
present when configuring the LonTalk network on a Trane domain.
8. To complete the installation on the Tracer SC, go to the D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y link on the
I n s t a l l a t i o n page of the user interface. The D i s c o v e r D e v i c e s page opens.
N o t e : The Tracer SC installation procedure will not change the DSN.
Retrofitting a LonTalk Link: Tracer Summit to a Tracer SC System

To move a LonTalk communication link from a Tracer Summit to a Tracer® SC system, follow
these steps in the order given:
1. If the site has custom bindings, use the Rover service tool to generate a Bindings Report.
N o t e : For information about using Rover, see the latest version of Rover Service Tool
Installation, Operation, and Programming (EMTX-SVX01).
2. Remove the communication link from the BCU.
N o t e : Connect the communication link to the Tracer SC following the wiring procedures
given in the BACnet MS/TP Wiring Best Practices (BAS-SVX051).
3. Connect and launch the Rover service tool.
LonTalk link.
N o t e : For information about using Rover, see “Connecting to a Tracer SC Using the LonTalk
Interface Adapter” in the latest version of Rover Service Tool Installation, Operation,
and Programming (EMTX-SVX01).
communication link. (From the Rover main menu, select G r o u p > T o o l M o d e > A c t i v e .)
When asked if this is a network installation, select N o . Two more screens appear to confirm
your selection; select Y e s for both.
6. Use Rover V7 in Active mode to re-create custom bindings.
7. To complete the installation on the Tracer SC:
• For factory-programmed unit controllers, refer to instructions for installing factory-
programmed LonTalk devices.
• For field-programmable unit controllers, refer to instructions for installing field-
programmable LonTalk devices.
N o t e : The installation procedure will not change the DSN.
Replacing LonTalk Unit Controllers

To replace a LonTalk unit controller on the Tracer® SC, follow these steps in order to ensure that:
BAS-SVX31U-EN 111
• The network configuration is not lost.

• The bindings between devices other than of the one being replaced are not lost.
• Currently installed controllers do not lose communication.
I m p o r t a n t : The selected device must match the functionality and configuration of the device
that is being replaced.
To replace a LonTalk unit controller:
1. Remove the old device from the communication link wiring.
I m p o r t a n t : Do not connect the new controller to the communication link wiring yet.
LonTalk link (see the following figure).
Figure 69. Rover Active Group View: devices on the LonTalk link
4. Identify a number that is not currently in use by looking in the D S N ( A ) column. Disconnect
the Rover service tool from the existing LonTalk link.
5. At the new device, remove the network configuration by holding down the service pin for 15
seconds. The red service LED will flash.
6. Connect the Rover service tool to the new device only, and click the L o n T a l k S e r v i c e T o o l
button. In the A c t i v e G r o u p V i e w table, “Unconfigured” will appear in the S t a t u s column
(see ).
Figure 70. Rover Active Group View: unit controller status appears as “unconfigured”
7. From the Rover main menu, select G r o u p > T o o l M o d e > A c t i v e to discover the new device.
When asked if this is a network installation, select N o . Two more screens appear to confirm
your selection; select Y e s for both.
8. After the device has been discovered, it will appear in the navigation tree. Right-click on it and
select D o m a i n E n t r y . A warning message will appear.
112 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Figure 71. Rover Active Group navigation tree: new device and domain entry selected
9. Click O K . The Domain Entry dialog box appears. The new device must be configured
independently with an unused DSN before reconnecting all the devices on the LonTalk link.
10. Enter the unused DSN that you identified in Step 4. Click S e t .
11. Configure the new device to match the settings of the device that has been replaced.
12. Connect the communication link wiring to the new unit controller.
13. Disconnect the Rover service tool.
14. To complete the installation on the Tracer SC, click I n s t a l l a t i o n > D e v i c e s . The D e v i c e s page
opens.
Figure 72. Replacing a device
15. Select the check box to the left of the device that is to be replaced, then select R e p l a c e
D e v i c e from the actions menu as shown in the above figure.
16. Select a communication link and then click D i s c o v e r . The device discovery process is
BAS-SVX31U-EN 113
initiated. When discovery is complete, a list of discovered devices appears.

17. From the list of discovered devices, select the replacement device and click R e p l a c e .
Adding LonTalk Unit Controllers

To add a LonTalk unit controller to an existing communication link that has been installed on the
Tracer SC, follow these steps to ensure that:
• The network configuration is not lost.
• The bindings between installed devices are not lost.
• Currently installed controllers do not lose communication.
To add a LonTalk unit controller:
I m p o r t a n t : Do not connect the new controller to the communication link wiring yet.
2. Connect and launch the Rover service tool. Configure the unit controller for application
specific information, such as point programming and TGP.
3. Navigate to the A c t i v e G r o u p V i e w screen on the Rover service tool.
4. Follow steps 4 through 11 of “Replacing LonTalk Unit Controllers”.
5. Set up the device for application specific features, such as VAV and fan coil, if not previously
programmed.
6. Connect the communication link wiring to the new unit controller.
7. Disconnect the Rover service tool.
8. To complete the installation on the Tracer SC, click I n s t a l l a t i o n > D e v i c e s . The D e v i c e s page
opens.
9. Click the D i s c o v e r D e v i c e s button, which initiates the device discovery process. To complete
device discovery, refer to instructions for Installing Factory-Programmed LonTalk Unit
Controllers, or Installing Field-Programmable LonTalk Unit Controllers.
114 BAS-SVX31U-EN
The Modbus Unit Controller Network
Modbus unit controllers are placed into one of two types — RTU or TCP. For more information,
refer to the Tracer SC System Controller Integration Guide, BAS-SVP028.
Although many of the discovery and installation steps are similar across communication links,
there are some notable differences depending on the link type.
• Both RS-485 links of the Tracer SC now support Modbus RTU devices in addition to BACnet
MS/TP. The link must be dedicated to either Modbus RTU or BACnet MS/TP.
• BACnet MS/TP must first be disabled for a link in order to enable Modbus RTU.
• Both Ethernet ports of the Tracer SC now support Modbus TCP devices.
• Modbus TCP and BACnet IP devices can coexist on the LAN.
Modbus RTU:
• Link 1 and Link 2 of the Tracer SC are enabled by default for BACnet MS/TP.
• If there are no BACnet controllers already installed on a given link, the Link can be enabled for
Modbus RTU. This action automatically disables BACnet MS/TP functionality for the Link.
Modbus TCP:
• Ethernet Network Port 1 and Port 2 on Tracer SC supports Modbus TCP communication.
• Although the links for Modbus RTU can be individually enabled and disabled, Port 1 and Port
2 for Modbus TCP (and BACnet IP) are always enabled.
Wire and Network Characteristics

Modbus TCP
• Uses standard Ethernet wire. Most Modbus TCP devices use the familiar RJ-45 connector for
Ethernet communications.
.
Modbus RTU
• Wiring tends to be more complicated. Tracer SC+ supports Modbus RTU using 2-wire EIA/
TIA-485.
• EIA/TIA-485 can be 2-wire or 4-wire. A 4-wire (full duplex) device can be converted to a 2-wire
(half-duplex) device.
– Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation. Typically, jumpering both transmit (+)
terminals and jumpering both receive (-) terminals will convert the device to be a 2-wire
device.
I m p o r t a n t : Modbus RTU wiring must be assembled in a daisy-chain configuration.
.
I m p o r t a n t : Some Modbus devices use Modbus RTU with EIA/TIA-232 wiring; these are N O T
supported by Tracer SC+. A third party, addressable EIA/TIA 232 to 485 converter can
be used to convert the device to EIA/TIA-485. Companies such as Advantech B+B
SmartWorx (formerly B&B Electronics) stock EIA/TIA-232 to EIA/TIA-485 converters.
Refer to manufacturer documentation for specific wiring requirements, termination resistors, and
the maximum number of devices supported per link. If third-party product literature is not
available, general low-data rate guidelines are as follows:
• Wire Style - braid or foil shield, twisted pair wire
• Wire Impedance – 120 ohms (recommended)
• Wire Capacitance – 16pF per foot
• Wire gauge – 18–24 AWG
• Maximum wire length – 4000 feet
• Termination resistors – 120 ohm (should match the wire impedance)
• Number of devices per link – 30
BAS-SVX31U-EN 115
The Modbus Unit Controller Network
Modbus Addressing
Modbus RTU is a Client/Server protocol where only one device is the client on a link. All
communication requests are initiated by the client. For this reason, there can only be a single
client controller on the Modbus network at a time. Tracer SC+ and most Modbus tools are client
devices; therefore, Tracer SC+ must be removed from the Modbus link before using most
Modbus tools.
Modbus RTU has a simple addressing scheme that uses only a server address. Each Modbus
server device must have a unique address.
• Modbus server addresses range from 0 through 247.
• Modbus client devices do not have an address.
• Address 0 is reserved for sending a broadcast message to all server devices. Tracer SC+ does
not use Modbus broadcasts.
Modbus TCP devices have a unit identifier and port number. The unit identifier is often referred
to as a server address, similar to Modbus RTU. Modbus TCP is not restricted to a single client. All
Modbus TCP devices must have a unique identifier.
Some Modbus TCP devices can represent multiple Modbus devices. In this case, they would use
the same IP address with a unique unit identifier. The port number may or may not be unique for
each Modbus device.
• Unit identifier or server address range 1 through 247, 255.
N o t e : 0 and 255 addresses are reserved for Modbus TCP devices that represent a single
Modbus TCP device.
• IP address of the Modbus TCP device.
• Port number (default is 502).
Refer to the manufacturer literature to properly configure the network parameters of a specific
Modbus TCP device.
Replacing Modbus Devices

1. From the D e v i c e s list page, select a device and then select R e p l a c e D e v i c e from the A c t i o n s
button. The R e p l a c e D e v i c e dialog box appears.
2. Select a communication link to discover the replacement device, and then click D i s c o v e r .
If the communication link is Modbus TCP enter the IP address, Port number, and address
range.
3. When discovery is complete, select a new device from the Replacement Device section, and
then click R e p l a c e .
4. Click r e p l a c e d e v i c e . The "replace device" loading popup appears, which refreshes the page.
116 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
Devices are the unit controllers, sensors, and communications wiring that provide the physical
control of the facility. After the unit controllers have been mounted and wired in the facility, you
are now ready to discover and install the devices.
This section contains the following topics:
• Discovering and installing BACnet, LonTalk, Legacy Comm 3/4 devices, and Modbus devices
• Creating and editing an equipment template
• Applying an existing template to a device
• Changing the display name of a device
• Replacing devices
• Deleting a device
• Updating the IP address of the centralized controller
Discovering and Installing SC-App and SC-Base Devices

After configuring the network settings for the Tracer® SC-App and the Tracer SC-Base, you must
now discover and install devices that will be communicating through the Tracer SC-Base. The
discovery and installation process must be facilitated by using the Tracer SC-App (except for TIS
ready sites with a single SC).
• For Single SC and Multiple SC facilities, devices must always be installed into the SC-App. D O
N O T install devices using the Tracer SC-Base.
• For TIS Ready sites where no SC-App exists, devices must be installed into the SC-Base.
To discover and install devices:
1. Connect to the Tracer SC-App using a USB connection or TCP/IP address.
2. Navigate to C o n f i g u r e B a s i c S e t t i n g s F o r T h i s T r a c e r S C located on the Tracer SC
Installation page, then click D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y .
3. Select the R e m o t e N e t w o r k v i a B A C n e t R o u t e r radio button.
4. The Tracer SC-App automatically searches for all Tracer SC-Base controllers in the facility. For
each BACnet MS/TP port that is enabled in a Tracer SC-Base, an additional network number
will appear in the list.
N o t e : If there are multiple Tracer SC-Apps on the same network and UDP port, they will also
be listed. Installation of devices already installed in another Tracer SC-App is not
supported.
5. Select a remote network, then click S t a r t D i s c o v e r y .
6. When discovery is complete, click I n s t a l l D e v i c e s .
7. The D e f i n e E q u i p m e n t f o r D e v i c e s page will list all the devices discovered on the selected
network.
8. Select the devices to be installed and then click I n s t a l l S e l e c t e d D e v i c e s .
9. The Tracer SC-App will now install the devices wired to the Tracer SC-Base.
Equipment wired to the Tracer SC-Base is now available for use in the applications of the
Tracer SC-App.
Discovering BACnet Devices

After physically installing the unit controllers (devices) on the Tracer® SC, BACnet devices must
be discovered and installed at the Tracer SC user interface.
1. From the left navigation menu, click D e v i c e s .
2. Click the D i s c o v e r D e v i c e s button. The D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y page opens.
3. Select BACnet MS/TP link 1 or link 2 and then click S t a r t D i s c o v e r y . After discovery is
complete, the Discovery in Progress subheading will change to Discovery Completed, and the
BAS-SVX31U-EN 117
Devices
button will change from C a n c e l d i s c o v e r y to I n s t a l l D e v i c e s .

4. Click i n s t a l l d e v i c e s . The D e f i n e E q u i p m e n t f o r D e v i c e s page opens.
5. Proceed to the following sections to install the devices (depending on whether the device is
factory- or field-programmed.
Figure 73. Device Discovery (BACnet)
Installing Factory-Programmed BACnet Devices

Factory-programmed controllers can be identified by “Will Auto Install” in the e q u i p m e n t
t e m p l a t e column in the Ready to Install section.
1. Select the devices that you want to install. Then click the i n s t a l l s e l e c t e d d e v i c e s button. A
confirmation pop-up window appears.
2. Click the I n s t a l l S e l e c t e d D e v i c e s button. The I n s t a l l a t i o n C o m p l e t e page appears, which
include a summary of the installed devices.
118 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
Figure 74. BACnet devices: will auto install
Installing Field-Programmable BACnet Devices

1. Review the D e f i n e f o r I n s t a l l a t i o n section. Field-programmable controllers can be identified
by “Template assignment required” in the s t a t u s column (see the following figure).
2. Select the device that you want to install. Depending on the device, you may be able to apply
an existing equipment template, or create a new equipment template.
Discovering LonTalk Devices

After physically installing the unit controllers (devices) on the Tracer® SC, LonTalk devices must
be discovered and installed at the Tracer SC user interface.
1. From the left navigation menu click D e v i c e s .
2. Click the D i s c o v e r D e v i c e s button. The D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y page opens.
3. Select the LonTalk communication link, and click S t a r t D i s c o v e r y . After discovery is
complete, the Discovery in Progress subheading will change to Discovery Completed, and the
button will change from c a n c e l d i s c o v e r y to i n s t a l l d e v i c e s .
4. Click i n s t a l l d e v i c e s . The I n s t a l l D e v i c e s : D e f i n e E q u i p m e n t f o r D e v i c e s page opens.
factory- or field-programmed).
BAS-SVX31U-EN 119
Devices
Figure 75. Device Discovery (LonTalk)
Installing Factory-Programmed LonTalk Devices

1. Review the Define for Installation section. Factory-programmed controllers can be identified
by “Will Auto Install” in the e q u i p m e n t t e m p l a t e column as shown in the following figure.
Figure 76. LonTalk devices: will auto install
Installing Field-Programmable LonTalk Devices

1. Review the D e f i n e f o r I n s t a l l a t i o n section. Field-programmable devices are identified by
“Template assignment required” in the S t a t u s column.
120 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
Figure 77. LonTalk devices: template assignment required
Discovering Legacy Comm3/4 Devices

After physically installing the unit controllers (devices) on the Tracer® SC, Legacy Comm 3/4
devices must be discovered and installed at the Tracer SC user interface
Legacy devices require the use of a Tracer Communication bridge in order to communicate with
Tracer SC. For more information, refer to the Tracer Communications Bridge Comm3/4 to Tracer
SC Configuration Guide, BAS-SVX064.
1. From the left navigation menu click D e v i c e s , then click D i s c o v e r D e v i c e s . The D e v i c e
D i s c o v e r y page opens.
2. Select the BACnet IP (Ethernet 1) communication link, and then click S t a r t D i s c o v e r y .
3. After discovery is complete, the Discovery in Progress subheading will change to Discovery
Completed and the button will change from C a n c e l d i s c o v e r y to I n s t a l l D e v i c e s .
4. Click I n s t a l l D e v i c e s . The D e f i n e E q u i p m e n t f o r D e v i c e s page opens.
factory- or field-programmed.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 121
Devices
Figure 78. Device discovery (Legacy Comm3/4 devices)
Installing Factory-Programmed Legacy Comm3/4 Devices

1. Review the D e f i n e f o r I n s t a l l a t i o n section. Factory-programmed controllers can be
identified by “Will Auto Install” in the e q u i p m e n t t e m p l a t e column. shows an example for
BACnet devices. The actual screen for Legacy Comm3/4 will closely resemble this.
2. The Comm3/4 devices will appear under the Define for Installation tab. The Comm3/4 bridge
will appear under the Cannot Install table, because the bridge is not considered a device that
can be installed.
3. Use the check boxes to select the devices, and then click I n s t a l l S e l e c t e d D e v i c e s . The
Installation Complete page appears, which provides a summary of the installed devices.
N o t e : Factory-programmed controllers can have additional input/output points (I/O)
programmed in the field. See for procedural help.
Installing Field-Programmable Legacy Comm3/4 Devices

1. Review the D e f i n e f o r I n s t a l l a t i o n section. Field-programmable controllers can be identified
by “Template assignment required” in the s t a t u s column. shows an example for BACnet
controllers. The actual screen for Legacy Comm3/4 will closely resemble this.
Discovering Modbus RTU Devices

After physically installing the controllers (devices) on the Tracer SC, Modbus devices must be
discovered and installed at the Tracer SC user interface. Before discovering and installing
devices, make any necessary configurations to the specific communication link as described
below. The settings for each link define the communication protocol in use. Modbus RTU and
BACnet MS/TP devices CANNOT co-exist on the same link. For more information, refer to the
Tracer SC Integration Guide (BAS-SVP028).
To enable Modbus RTU on either Link 1 and/or Link 2:
122 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
1. Navigate to I n s t a l l a t i o n > I d e n t i f i c a t i o n a n d C o m m u n i c a t i o n s .
2. Select the M o d b u s C o n f i g u r a t i o n tab, and then click E d i t .
3. For Link 1 and/or Link 2, edit the M o d b u s field to E n a b l e d .
4. Select the baud rate for the Modbus link(s).
5. Click S a v e .
N o t e : When Modbus is enabled for a link, BACnet for that link is automatically disabled.
With the Modbus link(s) properly configured, discovery can be initiated:
7. From the D e v i c e s page, click D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y . The D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y page opens.
8. Select the communication link (Link 2 in this example).
9. Optionally, select the L i m i t D i s c o v e r y t o a R a n g e o f M o d b u s A d d r e s s e s check box to limit
the address range for discovery, then edit the Start and End addresses for the limited range.
N o t e : Limiting the address range of discovery will reduce the overall time of device discovery.
10. Click S t a r t D i s c o v e r y .
Figure 79. Device discovery dialog box (RTU)
Discovering Modbus TCP Devices

After physically installing the controllers (devices) on the Tracer SC, Modbus devices must be
discovered and installed at the Tracer SC user interface.
Unlike Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP is always enabled and does not require link configuration.
Additionally, Modbus TCP devices can co-exist in the IP network with other TCP/IP devices,
including BACnet IP devices. For more information, refer to the Tracer SC Integration Guide,
BAS-SVP028.
Initiate discovery for a single Modbus TCP device:
2. From the D e v i c e s page, click D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y . The D e v i c e D i s c o v e r y page opens.
3. Select the M o d b u s T C P communication link.
4. 4. Enter the IP Address of the connected device, including the Port (default port is 502).
5. Optionally, select the L i m i t D i s c o v e r y t o a R a n g e o f M o d b u s A d d r e s s e s check box to limit
the address range for discovery, then edit the Start and End addresses for the limited range.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 123
Devices
N o t e : Limiting the address range of discovery will reduce the overall time of device discovery.
6. Click S t a r t D i s c o v e r y .
7. Repeat discovery for each Modbus TCP device, changing the IP Address for each device prior
to discovery.
Figure 80. Device discovery dialog box (TCP)
Creating a Virtual Equipment Template

In the following example, four identical constant volume rooftops that will be installed as virtual
equipment devices.
1. Following device discovery in Tracer SC, click I n s t a l l D e v i c e s . The D e f i n e E q u i p m e n t f o r
D e v i c e s page opens.
2. Select the gateway device from the list and then select C r e a t e M u l t i - e q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e
f r o m D e v i c e from the A c t i o n s button. The D e f i n e M u l t i - e q u i p m e n t D e v i c e T e m p l a t e page
opens.
124 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
Figure 81. Creating a virtual equipment template (Steps 1 and 2)
3. Click A d d V i r t u a l E q u i p m e n t . The V i r t u a l E q u i p m e n t I n f o r m a t i o n dialog opens.

N o t e : The total number of discovered device points is displayed in the upper right portion of
the page.
Figure 82. Add virtual equipment
The equipment template for the first rooftop unit must be defined. Because the template has
not yet been defined, a new template must be created.
4. Click C r e a t e N e w T e m p l a t e . Assign an appropriate name (Rooftop 1), and select drop-down
options based on the installed equipment type. Click N e x t .
5. Continue to define the virtual equipment template by mapping the required and suggested
standard keys.
N o t e : It may be necessary to use key conversion as part of this process if the standard key
and device point are not inherently compatible. Key conversion is a feature new to
Tracer SC V4.3.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 125
Devices
Figure 83. Create new template for virtual equipment
6. After all of the device points have been mapped to keys in the template, click A d d V i r t u a l
E q u i p m e n t . This completes the definition of the virtual equipment template. It can be reused
on the remaining three rooftop units.
I m p o r t a n t : After the virtual equipment template has been defined it cannot be edited. If any edits
are necessary, a new template must be created and associated with the device.
Editing Multi-equipment Device Templates

Unlike virtual equipment templates, the multi-equipment templates can be edited. Multi-
equipment templates contain one or more virtual equipment templates as part of their definition.
To add or remove one or more virtual devices to the template, edit the multi-equipment device
template as follows.
1. On the D e v i c e s page, click the M u l t i - e q u i p m e n t D e v i c e s tab.
2. Select the appropriate device and then select E d i t M u l t i - e q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e from the
A c t i o n s button.
126 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
Figure 84. Editing multi-equipment device templates (steps 1 and 2)
To redefine the multi-equipment template, either edit the existing virtual equipment list or add
(new) virtual equipment.
Editing Existing Virtual Equipment

1. On the D e v i c e s page, select the appropriate device and then click E d i t M u l t i - e q u i p m e n t
T e m p l a t e from the A c t i o n s button.
2. Click the A d d V i r t u a l E q u i p m e n t button to add additional virtual devices to the multi-
equipment template.
3. Define the additional virtual equipment, then select U p d a t e M u l t i - e q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 127
Devices
Figure 85. Edit existing virtual equipment
Adding New Virtual Equipment to an Existing Multi-equipment Template

1. On the D e v i c e s page, select the appropriate device and then click E d i t M u l t i - e q u i p m e n t
T e m p l a t e from the A c t i o n s button.
2. Click the A d d V i r t u a l E q u i p m e n t button to add additional virtual devices to the multi-
equipment template.
3. Define the additional virtual equipment, then select U p d a t e M u l t i - e q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e .
Creating an Equipment Template

1. From the Define Equipment for Devices page, select a device and then select C r e a t e
T e m p l a t e f r o m D e v i c e from the Actions button. The C r e a t e D e v i c e T e m p l a t e - D e f i n e
T e m p l a t e dialog box appears.
2. In the T e m p l a t e I n f o r m a t i o n section, complete all the fields:
a. Enter a name for the template that does not include spaces. Trane recommends using the
equipment type followed by “template” and a letter; for example, “CV_template_A.”
b. Select the equipment family and type, which will determine where the equipment appears
in the Tracer® SC user interface.
Or, choose S e l e c t E x i s t i n g T e m p l a t e if most information you need for a template is very
similar to an existing one, or if you are installing a Tracer UC800.
N o t e : For items that exist in the template, but not in the device, the key mapping is
omitted and will not display.
128 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
Figure 86. Define equipment template (information section)
3. Click N e x t . The M a p R e q u i r e d a n d S u g g e s t e d K e y s dialog box appears as shown in the

following figure.
4. In the Required Keys section, select a device point for Occupancy Request (AHUs and spaces)
from the drop-down list. For chillers, select a point for Chiller Auto Stop Command.
5. In the Keys Used By Tracer SC Applications section, select device points for the associated
keys to be used in Tracer SC applications such as Area and VAS. Or, select Not used to
exclude from the template.
N o t e : By default, the system will attempt to auto-map a suggested status key to a device
point. If there is no match, then the “Not used” option appears by default.
6. In the Keys Used for Status Displays and Standard Graphics section, select device points for
common keys that will populate equipment status displays or on standard graphic pages.
7. Click N e x t . The M a p t h e R e m a i n i n g P o i n t s i n t h e D e v i c e dialog box appears.
8. Confirm that the points in the list that are selected to be mapped should be. Deselect points
that should be excluded from the template. To edit key mapping or create user keys, click the
more options button , which opens the More Options dialog box.
N o t e : Generic templates: By default, every point in the list will be selected. Deselect any
points that should be excluded from the template.
9. Click Next. The Template Summary popup appears. Click C r e a t e T e m p l a t e . You will be
returned to the Define Equipment for Devices page.
10. Click the I n s t a l l S e l e c t e d D e v i c e s button. The I n s t a l l D e v i c e s page shows the installation
progress. When installation is complete, the new devices will appear on the D e v i c e s page
and the E q u i p m e n t or S p a c e s list pages, depending on the type of equipment.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 129
Devices
Figure 87. Mapping required and suggested keys
Editing an Equipment Template

To edit an equipment template:
1. From the left navigation menu, click i n s t a l l a t i o n > d e v i c e s . The D e v i c e s list page opens.
2. Select the preferred device from the list and then select e d i t t e m p l a t e from the a c t i o n s
menu. The E d i t E q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e page opens.
3. Provide a new name for the template and make your preferred changes in the M a p
E q u i p m e n t K e y s t o D e v i c e P r o p e r t i e s section. The equipment family or type cannot be
changed.
4. Click s a v e . Tracer® SC loads the new data into each device that was previously assigned to
the equipment template. The status for each device is shown in the E d i t E q u i p m e n t
T e m p l a t e S t a t u s Panel. This make take several minutes.
I m p o r t a n t : Closing this page will cause all edits to be lost.
Editing an Equipment Template When adding Additional Points

You can add additional input and output points to factory-programmed BACnet controllers in the
field after they have been discovered.
To add additional points:
1. From the left navigation menu, click D e v i c e s . The D e v i c e s list page opens.
2. Select the preferred device from the list and then select e d i t t e m p l a t e from the a c t i o n s
menu. The E d i t D e v i c e T e m p l a t e dialog box opens.
3. Make your preferred changes. The equipment family or type cannot be changed.
4. In the M a p E q u i p m e n t K e y s t o D e v i c e P r o p e r t i e s section, select the equipment keys to
130 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
map to the device properties (points). If necessary, you can create additional equipment keys
for points that cannot be mapped to a key.
5. Click N e x t . Select a different device points for the following (if preferred): Occupancy Request
and Keys Used by Tracer® SC Applications section.
6. Click N e x t .
7. Map any remaining points in the device, or create new keys if necessary.
8. Click N e x t . The Template Summary dialog opens.
N o t e : In Tracer SC versions earlier than V3.0, the edit template function is not supported for
auto-installed controllers.
Deleting an Equipment Template

N o t e : Templates that are currently in use cannot be deleted.
To delete an equipment template:
1. From the left navigation menu click T o o l s > E q u i p m e n t t e m p l a t e s . The E q u i p m e n t
T e m p l a t e s list page opens.
2. Select the template that you want to delete and then click D e l e t e from the A c t i o n s menu.
Applying an Existing Template to a Device

To apply an existing template to a device/multiple devices:
1. On the Define for Installation page for any type of device, select a device and then select one
of the following from the A c t i o n s button:
• E d i t D i s p l a y N a m e / T e m p l a t e – if you are applying a template to a single device..
• A s s i g n T e m p l a t e – If you are applying a template to multiple devices, select the option.
Figure 88, p. 131 shows the dialog box for a single device; the assign template for multiple
devices is very similar.
2. Select the appropriate template from the Custom EquipmentTemplate list, and then click
Continue.
3. Repeat the above steps for each device that needs an existing template assigned to it.
4. When you are ready to install, click i n s t a l l s e l e c t e d d e v i c e s .
Figure 88. Assign an existing template
Exporting and Importing Equipment Templates

You can copy equipment templates and equipment keys from one Tracer® SC to another Tracer
SC by using the export and import functions. Copying equipment templates is useful when
BAS-SVX31U-EN 131
Devices
working on multiple job sites. For example, if the unit controls are identical, or even similar to
those in building A, then the equipment templates and keys can be imported to the Tracer SC in
building B.
To export equipment templates:
1. From the left navigation menu click T o o l s > E q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e s . The E q u i p m e n t
T e m p l a t e s page opens.
2. Select one or more equipment templates from the list and then select e x p o r t from the
A c t i o n s button as shown in the following figure. The F i l e D o w n l o a d dialog box appears.
3. Click S a v e F i l e to copy to your local PC hard drive or another external storage device.
Figure 89. Exporting an equipment template
To import equipment templates:

4. From the left navigation menu click T o o l s > E q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e s . The E q u i p m e n t
T e m p l a t e s page opens.
5. Click the I m p o r t T e m p l a t e s button.. The I m p o r t E q u i p m e n t T e m p l a t e s a n d K e y s page
opens.
6. In the T e m p l a t e F i l e n a m e field, browse for the template file to be imported.
7. Click I m p o r t . Tracer SC begins the file loading process and then the I m p o r t E q u i p m e n t
T e m p l a t e s a n d K e y s page opens.
8. Use the check boxes to select the equipment templates and keys to be saved in the Tracer SC.
9. Click F i n i s h .
N o t e : All equipment templates and keys must have unique names. If duplicate names are
discovered, the rename template or rename key dialog box appears. Enter a new name
in the field, then click rename. Keys — display names cannot exceed 64 characters.
Equipment templates — display names cannot exceed 64 characters or contain spaces.
Replacing a Device
Before replacing a device, ensure that the new device has been properly configured. Devices are
typically replaced when an installed device has failed. For device replacement instructions, see
“Replacing BACnet Unit Controllers,” p. 109, “Replacing LonTalk Unit Controllers,” p. 111, and
“Replacing Modbus Devices,” p. 116.
132 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Devices
N o t e s : The selected device must match the functionality and configuration of the device it is
replacing.
• Air Flow Override
• Auto Commissioning Command
• Auxiliary Heat Control Request
• Base Loading Auto/On Request BAS
• Base Loading Setpoint
• Chilled Water Setpoint
• Chiller Auto Stop Command BAS
• Chiller Mode Command BAS
• Current Limit Setpoint
• Demand Limit Request BAS
• Demand Limit Setpoint
• Discharge Air Cooling Setpoint BAS
• Discharge Air Heating Setpoint BAS
• Discharge Air Reheat Setpoint BAS
• Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Active
• Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint BAS
• Duct Static Pressure Setpoint BAS
• Economizer Airside Enable BAS
• Economizer Minimum Position Enable Command
• Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint BAS
• Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint BAS
• Electric Heat Timer Reset
• Emergency Override BAS
• Exhaust Fan Minimum Speed BAS
• Filter Timer Reset
• Heat Cool Mode Request
• Hot Water Setpoint
• Keypad Lockout
• Morning Warmup Setpoint BAS
• Noise Reduction Request BAS
• Occupancy Request
• Occupied Offset
• Occupied Standby Offset
• Outdoor Air Minimum Flow Setpoint BAS
• Outdoor Air Minimum Flow Setpoint BAS
• Reset Diagnostic
• Return Fan Minimum Speed BAS
• Reversing Valve
• Source Temperature BAS
• Space Static Pressure Setpoint BAS
• Space Static Pressure Setpoint BAS
• Space Temperature Setpoint BAS
BAS-SVX31U-EN 133
Devices
• Supply Fan Minimum Speed BAS

• System Control Command
• Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint
• Unoccupied Heating Setpoint
• Ventilation Ratio Limit BAS
• Water Valve Override
Refreshing Equipment (Devices)

This action updates configuration changes made to the equipment without the need to
rediscover and reinstall the equipment. This action can be used on multiple pieces of equipment
simultaneously.
Following are examples when refreshing equipment might be used:
• A user has edited an equipment key assigned to a device and wants to update the device with
new data.
• A user has imported a new template from another device and wants to update the equipment
to the new template definitions.
• A technician has upgraded the firmware in a device that adds new properties or
communication performance enhancements between the device and Tracer® SC.
To refresh equipment:
1. From the D e v i c e s list page, select a device and then select r e f r e s h e q u i p m e n t from the
actions button.
2. The r e f r e s h i n g d e v i c e loading pop-up appears, which refreshes the page.
3. When the D e v i c e R e f r e s h S t a t u s dialog box appears, click O K .
Changing the Display Name of an Installed Device (Equipment)

To change the name of an installed device (equipment):
1. Select D e v i c e s from the Tracer® SC left navigation menu. The D e v i c e s page opens.
2. Select the check box to the left of the device that is to have its display name changed. From
actions menu, select c h a n g e d i s p l a y n a m e . A popup window appears. Enter the new display
name.
3. Click S a v e . The new display name will appear in the d i s p l a y n a m e column.
Deleting a Device
To delete a device:
1. Select D e v i c e s from the Tracer® SC left navigation menu. The D e v i c e s page opens.
2. Select the check box to the left of the device (or devices) that is to be deleted. From the
actions, menu, select d e l e t e . A confirmation window appears.
3. Click Y e s – D e l e t e . The devices will be removed from the list of devices.
N o t e : Before deleting a device, remove the device from TGP programs and applications such
as Area, VAS, and Scheduling. The Tracer SC does not automatically remove a device
from application memberships. Any graphics that reference information on the device
that is to be deleted will need to be corrected.
134 BAS-SVX31U-EN
LEDs and the 7–Segment Display
This section describes how to interpret the activity of the Tracer® SC LEDs and the 7–segment
display.
Powering Up/Powering Down the Tracer SC

To power up the Tracer SC, press the power button.
All LEDs illuminate and the following sequence flashes on the 7-segment display: 8, 7, 9*, 5, 4, L,
dancing dash pattern. The dancing dashes persist while the Tracer SC is operating normally.
N o t e : 7-segment 6 was changed to 9 to indicate the new boot file had been successfully applied.
To power down the Tracer SC, press the power button. The 7-segment display performs a shut-
down sequence (3, -, 2, -, 1, -) before the Tracer SC powers down.
The LEDs and the 7–Segment Display

The LEDs and the 7-segment display on the Tracer SC indicate the operation and communication
status of the Tracer building automation system. The following figure and the corresponding
table show their locations on the front of the controller.
Figure 90. Location of the LEDs and the 7–segment display on Tracer SC
6
3
1 2 4 5 7
12 11 10 9
8
Callout Number in
Figure Description
1 Power button
2 LonTalk communication LEDs
3 BACnet MS/TP link 1 communication LEDs
4 BACnet MS/TP link 2 communication LEDs
5 EIA-232 LEDs
6 IMC LEDs
7 Status LED
8 Ethernet 2 LEDs
9 Ethernet 1 LEDs
BAS-SVX31U-EN 135
Callout Number in
Figure Description
10 7-segment display
11 LonTalk service pin
12 LonTalk service LED
Interpreting the LEDs

The following table identifies the LEDs and interprets their activity.
Table 9. LED identification and interpretation
LED type LED activity Indicates...
On steady (green) Power reception
Flashing (red), and an “F” appears on the

Fatal error. Service required.
Status 7-segment display followed by a code
Flashing (red), and an “H” appears on the

Hardware failure. SC will probably need to be replaced.
7-segment display followed by a code
L1 TX flickers (green) Data transmission

Link 1 communication
L1 RX flickers (yellow) Data reception
L2 TX flickers (green) Data transmission

Link 2 communication
L2 RX flickers (yellow) Data reception
Lon TX flickers (green) Data transmission

LonTalk communication
Lon RX flickers (yellow) Data reception
LonTalk service pin has been pressed:

• Short press–broadcast neuron ID and program ID
identifies itself so Rover can assign it a DSN.
LonTalk service On steady (red)
• Long press (more than 15 sec.)–Forces the SC LON
node to an unconfigured state and disables LonTalk
until reconfigured with Rover.
IOIOI TX (green) Data transmission

|O|O| [EIA-232 serial connection]
IOIOIO RX (yellow) Data reception
IMC TX (green) Data transmission

IMC
IMC RX (yellow) Data reception
LINK on steady (green) Valid Ethernet connection

Ethernet 1, Ethernet 2
ACT flickers (yellow) Data transmission and reception
Interpreting the 7–Segment Display

The 7–segment display shows the operating status of the Tracer SC as described in the following
table.
Table 10. 7-segment display: Codes and interpretation
Red/Green LED 7-segment display Indicates...
Processor in reset, or no functioning software. A persistent “8” means

Green 8
that service is required.
Green 7 Starting level 1 boot loader
Green 9 Starting level 2 boot loader
136 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 10. 7-segment display: Codes and interpretation (continued)
Red/Green LED 7-segment display Indicates...
Entering operating system. A persistent “5” means the operating

Green 5
system is malfunctioning.
Green 4 (this number remains for a few seconds) Booting operating system.
Green –L Loading and initializing main program.
“Dancing dash” dashes flash one at a

Green Normal operation
time: top, middle, bottom
3, -, 2, -, 1, - Power button was pressed and Tracer SC is shutting down. May take
Green
(sequence repeats) 10 or more seconds.
3, 2, 1 Main program shutting down due to reboot command. In most cases,

Green
(sequence repeats) the main program will be restarted.
Mismatch between level 1 boot loader and hardware. Service is

Flashing Red 7F
required.
Flashing Red 7H Hardware failure. SC will probably need to be replaced.
Flashing Red 7A Missing level 2 boot loader.
Flashing Red 7U Mismatch between level 2 boot loader and hardware.
Rotary switch was changed. The new setting of the changed switch is
Green Single digit during operation
displayed on the 7-segment LED for several seconds.
U, P, d Firmware update is in progress.
Updating of the operating system is finished. The Tracer SC can be

d, o, n, E
powered off, the SD card removed, and the Tracer SC restarted.
Rotary switches set to 999; forced return to factory defaults in

F, o, r, C, E
progress.
Tracer SC is restoring factory defaults (whether by force return, UI

C, L, E, A, r
command, or at the beginning of a database restore operation).
r Database restore in progress.
Main program is delayed due to multiple crashes (may take up to 4

Flashing Red H, O, L, d
hours).
Cannot load operating system. May be remedied by SD-card update

Red F
with appropriate software version.
Power button was pressed when main program was not running/not
Flashing Green U
responsive. SC is shutting down; wait for LEDs to turn off.
N o r m a l s t a r t u p s e q u e n c e : 8, 7, 9, 5, 4, -L, dancing dashes

S h u t d o w n s e q u e n c e : Press power button. LED displays 3, -, 2, - 1 - until the application shuts
down. Press the power button to turn power off.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 137
Troubleshooting
The following troubleshooting suggestions are meant to help resolve most common problems
associated with the Tracer® SC. If you are unable to resolve a problem, contact a qualified Trane
service technician or the Trane Product Support team.
Troubleshooting with LEDs and the 7-Segment Display

The LEDs and the 7-segment display can be used for troubleshooting. Refer to the following table
for causes and resolutions to specific LED displays.
Event Probable cause Resolution
To reset the Tracer SC, press the power

7-segment display sequence does not follow button to shut down, and then press again to
May indicate a failure of the Tracer SC.
the start-up sequence restart. Contact the Trane Product Support
team if this does not solve the problem
Contact the Trane Product Support team for

F code displays on the 7-segment display Indicates a fatal error.
assistance.
This code indicates that a recoverable error is Contact the Trane Product Support team if
H, o, L, D displays on the 7-segment display present, and is waiting to restart. The restart your Tracer SC does not restart after the
process may take up to four hours. maximum four hour period.
Check all cables and connections. It may be

This indicates that the Tracer SC is not possible that the Ethernet cable is not
Ethernet LINK LED is not illuminated
connected to Ethernet. working. Attempt to resolve by replacing the
Ethernet cable.
This indicates that communication does not Verify that the IP address you have entered is
Ethernet ACT LED is not illuminated
exist between the Tracer SC and Ethernet. correct.
Red status LED along with an F code or H code

Contact the Trane Product Support team
on the 7-segment display
Verify that the power supply is functioning

Status LED is unlit. The Tracer SC is not receiving power.
properly.
LonTalk Service LED is red

Note: Upon startup, the LonTalk LED is Contact the Trane Product Support team.
momentarily red and is not a cause for
alarm.
Attempt to resolve the problem by cycling

7-segment display shows 3, 2, 1 and then Indicates that the application is shutting
power to the SC. If it recurs, contact the Trane
lower-left, upper-right in sequence down and not restarting.
Product Support team.
Force Return to Factory Defaults

In some cases, a corrupt database or similar problem may prevent you from accessing the Tracer
SC user interface in order to return to factory defaults.
If this occurs, do the following to return to factory defaults:
1. Power down the Tracer SC.
2. Reset the rotary switches to “999.”
3. Power up the Tracer SC.
The 7-segment display shows F, o, r, C, E.
4. Within 30 seconds, set the rotary switches to the intended normal value.
The 7-segment display shows C, L, E, A, r, indicating that the database is being cleared. It will
then resume normal operation showing –L on the 7-segment display during startup and then
“dancing dashes.”
N o t e : If rotary switches are not reset within 30 seconds, the Tracer SC will power down
leaving the database intact.
138 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Network Connections

Troubleshoot network connections to a Tracer SC by using the following tools and procedures.
PING
PING is a PC utility that is provided with every Microsoft operating system. You can use it to
verify the connectivity between two devices on an IP network.
To perform the test:
2. In Run, type p i n g followed by the IP address of the device you want to verify connection with.
Click Enter.
You will receive a message with either a positive or negative response. A positive response to
PING, but a negative response to the Web browser may indicate a problem with proxy
settings, IP addressing, or network communication.
IPCONFIG
IPCONFIG is a software program that is provided with every Microsoft operating system. It
identifies all of the configured connections for your PC. Use this tool to verify your connection
settings.
To perform the test:
2. In Run, type c m d . Click Enter.
3. In the cmd/exe window, type i p c o n f i g / . Click E n t e r .
You will receive a detailed list of all hardware and software connections and their settings.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 139
Specifications
This section contains specifications for Tracer SC system controllers and for Tracer building
automation systems.
Table 11. Tracer SC specifications
Microsoft Windows 7:
• Internet Explorer™ (version 11.0)
• Mozilla Firefox® (latest version
• Google Chrome™— latest version)
Microsoft Windows 8.1: (no support)
Microsoft Windows 10:
• Internet Explorer™— no support
• Mozilla Firefox® (latest version)
• Google Chrome™ (latest version)
• Microsoft Edge™ (latest version)
Apple®Mac OS (Latest — 1):
• Mozilla Firefox (latest version)
• Google Chrome (latest version)
• Safari® (latest version)
iOS ® (Latest – 1):

• Safari (latest version)
Android — 4.4+:
• Google Chrome (latest version)
Mobile Devices Microsoft® Windows 10
Tracer SC • Microsoft Edge™ (latest version)
system • Google Chrome (latest version)
controller
• Mozilla FireFox (latest version)
Concurrent Users • Five
Up to four languages are supported per Tracer

SC.
• English
• Chinese (Simplified/Traditional)
• French
• French Canadian
• Portuguese (Brazil)
• German
Supported Languages
• Indonesian
• Japanese
• Korean
• Spanish (Latin America)
• Thai
• Polish
• Arabic
140 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Specifications
Table 11. Tracer SC specifications (continued)

Power requirements From PM014 Power Supply: 24 Vdc @ 0.3A;
14VA max (PM014 input VA)
Operating environment
• Temperature: From –40°F to 122°F (–
40°C to 50°C)
• Relative humidity: From 10% to 90%,
non-condensing
Storage environment
• Temperature: From –40°F to 158°F (–
40°C to 70°C)
• Relative humidity: From 5% to 95%,
non-condensing
UL:
• UL-864/UUKL listed (when installed and
programmed in accordance with the
Engineered Smoke Control System
Application Guide, BAS-APG019-EN)
Tracer SC • UL-916-PAZX – energy management
system • CUL-C22.2-signal devices – Canada
controller Agency Listings FCC:
• FCC part 15, Class A CE
CE:
• The European Union (EU) Declaration of
Conformity is available from your local
Trane® office.
ISO:
• 9001:2008
Processor PowerPC405 Core
• FLASH 400 MB
Memory
• SDRAM 256 MB
• No battery required. The clock is

maintained for a minimum of three days
Battery by the super capacitor. All other
programs are backed up by nonvolatile
memory.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 141
Specifications
Tracer building automation systems

communicates with BACnet devices that
support:
• Communications based on the BACnet
ASHRAE/ANSI 2012 standard
BACnet • ENV-1805-1/ENV-13321-1
• User Datagram Protocol/Internet (UDP/
IP) compatible network
Tracer SC is listed by BACnet Test Labs (BTL)
as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).
Listing information can be found at: http://
www.bacnetinternational.net
Tracer building automation systems

communicates with LonTalk devices that
support:
• Communications based on the EIA-709.1
(LonTalk) standard
LonTalk
• LonTalk standard network variable types
(SNVTs)
• FTT-10A or FT-X1 transceivers
• Twisted-pair physical media (Level 4
wiring)
• Communications based on Modbus RTU

defacto standard over EIA/TIA 485 (2–
wire)
Modbus • Communications based on Modbus TCP
defacto standard over 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Protocol compatible network
Communica-
tions Tracer SC facility (combination of all
protocols)
• Up to 240 devices
BACnet (per link/Per facility)
• Tracer UC200 Series - 60/240
• Tracer UC600 Series- 10/20
• BCI Series - 60/240
• Trane Communicating Thermostats - 60/
120
• Non-Trane BACnet - 32/240
LonTalk (Per link/Per facility)
Device Limits • AH Series - 120/120

• CH Series - 120/120
• VV Series - 120/120
• ZN Series - 120/120
• MP503 - 120/120
• MP580 - 20/20
• Trane Communicating Thermostats -
120/120
• Non-Trane LON - 120/120
Modbus (Per link/Per facility)
• Modbus TCP – 240/NA
• Modbus RTU – 60/NA
Air-Fi Wireless (Per network/Per facility)
• WCI - 30/240
142 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Specifications

NEMA Type NEMA-1
Medium Weight 14 lb. (6.5 kg)

Enclosure
(optional) Mounting Wall-mounted with #10 (5 mm) screws and
#10 wall anchors. Mounting surface must be
able to support 60 lb. (28 kg)
NEMA Type NEMA-1
Weight 50 lb (23.0 kg)

Large Enclosure
(optional)
Mounting Wall-mounted with #10 (5 mm) screws and
#10 wall anchors. Mounting surface must be
able to support 120 lb. (56 kg)
BAS-SVX31U-EN 143
Resources
The following is a list of related Tracer® SC documentation and training resources.
• Tracer SC System Controller Installation Sheet (X39641154-01)
For mounting the enclosure and providing AC power.
• Tracer SC Help
An online help system is included with the Tracer SC user interface. Global help has a
table of contents and is searchable. Contextual help is specific to the information on each
page.
• Tracer BAS Operator Suite (Mobile App) Getting Started Guide (BAS-SVU23)
Describes how to obtain, download, install, and set up the mobile app.
• BACnet® MS/TP Best Practices and Troubleshooting (BAS-SVX051)
Provides best practices, procedures, and troubleshooting for wiring BACnet unit
controllers to a Tracer SC system controller.
• Tracer SC Air Systems Application Guide (BAS-APG007)
Describes variable-air-volume strategies for variable air systems. It also include constant-
volume applications and area application strategies for Tracer SC.
• Tracer Graphical Programming (TGP2) Applications Guide (BAS-APG008)
Describes how to use the TGP2 editor and typical implementation strategies and best
practices for using TGP2.
• Tracer TU Service Tool Getting Started Guide (TTU-SVN01)
This document describes how to use the Tracer TU service tool to
– Transfer programs to the Tracer SC
– Start the Tracer Graphical Programming (TGP2) Editor and the Tracer Graphics Editor
from within Tracer TU
– Backing up and restoring firmware and TGP2 programs
• Rover™ Service Tool Installation, Operation, and Programming Guide (EMTX-SVX01)
Describes how to use the Rover service tool for configuring, monitoring, and testing
Tracer controllers that use Comm4 and LonTalk communications.
• Trane College of Building Automation
The Trane College of Building Automation (TCBA) offers a comprehensive portfolio of
technical courses to help you effectively monitor and coordinate your HVAC equipment
and systems.
https://tranetechnologies.sharepoint.com/commhvac
144 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Building Network Installation Memo
You can use this memo for communicating your networking needs to the IT staff.
T o : IT Staff
F r o m : Local Trane office
D a t e : __________________
S u b j e c t : Tracer® building automation system installation
As part of the upcoming building renovation project, Trane has been selected to provide the new
facility-wide Tracer building automation system. This system will control heating, air
conditioning, and ventilation in the building, which will provide increased comfort and decreased
utility costs.
Tracer SCs will be used for configuration and operation and to control the equipment in the
building. As part of the construction specifications, Trane will be using the IP network for
communication.
The Tracer building automation system uses the BACnet protocol, ASHRAE/ANSI 135-95 and IP
communication adheres to annex J-1999 of the same standard.
Any point of access to the corporate Intranet can be used to connect the Tracer building
automation system.
Critical networking requirements are as follows:
• The items requested in the table below for each Tracer SC:
Provided by IT Provided by Trane
Network
jacks
(10Bas-
Location eT) IP address(a) Subnet mask Gateway address MAC address
(a)
If using a DHCP server, please provide static IP addresses.
• For BACnet device communications, the UDP port address is 47808. If IT wants to use a
different address, please enter it here:
UDP port: ___________________________
• A firewall that allows UDP at the designated port and exposes the IP addresses of the Tracer
SC.
• NTP server address: ___________________ (for acquiring network time for use by Tracer SC)
• SMTP server address: ____________________(for sending e-mail notifications of alarms)
Please e-mail the information requested to my e-mail address ________________________________,
or fax this page to me _______________________________.
If you have any questions or concerns, please call me at ______________________________.
Thank you,
Project Manager
BAS-SVX31U-EN 145
Setting Up Trane Connect Remote Access
This section describes the process of setting up Trane Connect Remote Access to enable safe and
secure remote access to the Tracer BAS.
Registering a Tracer BAS Controller or Tracer Concierge with TIS

Command Center
The following procedure describes how to register a new Tracer BAS controller in the TIS
Command Center (mybuilding.trane.com). Trane Offices and Trane technicians use this interface
to self-register Tracer BAS controllers in the TIS Command Center and to set up Trane Connect.
1. Log on to mybuilding.trane.com. Click on T I S C o m m a n d C e n t e r , then click S i t e
A d m i n i s t r a t i o n from the W e l c o m e drop-down list. The Account Overview page opens (see
Figure 92, p. 147).
Figure 91. Navigating to Site Administration (TIS Command Center)
2. In the C o n n e c t i v i t y I n f o r m a t i o n section, select SC from the C o n n e c t i o n T y p e drop-down

list. Then enter the Tracer BAS controller’s hardware serial numbers in the provided fields.
3. In the O w n e r / A c c o u n t I n f o r m a t i o n section, select an existing account or enter a new one.
4. Enter the name and address of the facility in the provided fields.
5. Select a Trane office from the O f f i c e N a m e drop-down list.
6. In the A d m i n E m a i l I n f o r m a t i o n section, enter the name and e-mail address of the
individual who will serve as the Trane Connect customer administrator for the facility. (This
information is only required if setting up remote access for customers.)
Only two customer Admins can be created for each Tracer BAS controller. The Customer
Admin user is the only user who can set up other customer users. A customer user can
remotely access a Tracer BAS using Trane Connect.
7. Agree to the Terms and Conditions and then click S a v e .
8. Proceed to “Customer Admin Initial Account Creation,” p. 149, if setting up remote access for
customers.
146 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Figure 92. Registering a Tracer BAS controller (TIS Command Center)
Modifying a Previously Registered Tracer BAS Controller

The following process describes how to add a new customer administrator to an existing Tracer
BAS controller in TIS Command Center (mybuilding.trane.com).
1. In TIS Command Center, select the Tracer BAS controller (facility) and then click E d i t F a c i l i t y
S e t t i n g s from the A c t i o n s menu (see Figure 93, p. 148).
BAS-SVX31U-EN 147
Figure 93. Edit a Facility (TIS Command Center)
2. From the left-hand menu, click A c c o u n t a n d C o n n e c t i v i t y . The Edit Facilities page opens
(Figure 94, p. 149).
3. In the A d m i n E m a i l I n f o r m a t i o n section, enter the name and e-mail address of the
individual who will serve as the Trane Connect Remote Access customer administrator for the
facility. (This information is only required if setting up remote access for customers.)
Only two customer Admins can be created for each Tracer BAS controller. The Customer
Admin user is the only user who can set up other customer users. A customer user can
remotely access a Tracer BAS using Trane Connect Remote Access.
4. Agree to the Terms and Conditions and then click S a v e .
5. Proceed to “Customer Admin Initial Account Creation,” p. 149, if setting up remote access for
customers.
148 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Figure 94. Add a customer administrator (TIS Command Center)
Customer Admin Initial Account Creation

The customer admin who was defined in TIS Command Center will receive a “Welcome to Trane
Connect” e-mail message. Trane Connect utilizes Okta, a User Authentication tool, to do the
following:
• Synchronize Trane Active Directory users with Trane Connect users.
• Authenticate customers with Trane Connect.
To authenticate a new customer admin account:
1. Upon receipt of the “Welcome to Trane Connect” e-mail, click on the activation link (see the
following figure).
I m p o r t a n t : The customer administrator m u s t a c t i v a t e t h e l i n k i n t h e e - m a i l w i t h i n 7 d a y s
or the account activation will expire.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 149
2. The account creation screen appears after clicking the activation link (see the following
figure). Enter and re-enter a new password, select a security question/answer, and select a
security image that will be presented upon subsequent logins.
150 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Upon successful account creation and login, the customer activation screen appears (see the
following figure).
3. Click the Trane Connect image, which opens traneconnect.com.

N o t e : Customers who have more than one site will see a list of multiple sites.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 151
Logging in to Trane Connect

After customer administrators have activated their accounts from the Welcome to Trane Connect
e-mail, they are now able to access Trane Connect.
1. Navigate to TraneConnect.com. The Trane Connect login page opens (see the following
figure).
2. Enter the credentials that were created in the Customer Account Creation procedure and then
click the Login button. The C o n n e c t t o a D e v i c e page opens, in which displays a list of
devices that you can securely connect to.
N o t e : It is recommended that users create a bookmark for traneconnect.com in order to
navigate directly to the site on subsequent visits.
3. Select the device to which you want to connect. Click on the C o n n e c t button in the Launch
Device column to open the Tracer BAS user interface. A new browser tab is launched, which
displays a login page for the device.
N o t e : Multiple devices can be accessed simultaneously in separate browser tabs.
Creating Additional Trane Connect Users

Customer admins have the ability to create and delete accounts for additional users for each
device.
1. Log into Trane Connect. Click the Set Up icon located at the top of the left navigation menu,
then select U s e r M a n a g e m e n t (see the following figure). A list of current users is displayed.
152 BAS-SVX31U-EN
2. From the upper-right portion of the screen, click C r e a t e N e w U s e r . The A d d U s e r dialog box
appears.
3. Search for the user’s location/organization in the search box. Enter the user information,
Trane Connect role, and appropriate devices for the user.
4. When complete, click S a v e U s e r .
The user will receive a Welcome to Trane Connect e-mail.
I m p o r t a n t : The new user m u s t a c t i v a t e t h e l i n k i n t h e e - m a i l w i t h i n 7 d a y s or the account
activation will expire.
Trane Connect utilizes a User Authentication tool called Okta to do the following:
BAS-SVX31U-EN 153
• Synchronize Trane Active Directory users with Trane Connect users.

• Authenticate customers with Trane Connect.
If a user requests the e-mail be resent, or if a user profile must be edited, click the appropriate
icon located in the individual user list (see the following figure).
Frequently Asked Questions

Can I utilize Tracer TU, Tracer Summit, Rover, or other tools with Trane Connect Remote
Access?
These tools can be used, but only through TIS Command Center and with the OpenVPN client
installed on the client workstation. Trane employees (not customers) can continue to utilize these
tools in the same manner as they always have.
Is there a charge for Trane Connect Remote Access?
Trane Connect Remote Access is free and does not require an Intelligent Services contract.
If my customers can access Comfortsite and have Trane University credentials, do they
need Trane Connect too?
Yes. Trane Connect is a separate application from Comfortsite and Trane University, and requires
separate credentials. Terms and Conditions for using Trane Connect are included in your
Controls Contracting Agreement with the customer, as well as in the Tracer BAS EULA.
How can I get the “Welcome to Trane Connect” e-mail for customer admin users re-sent if
the link expires after the 7–day period?
Contact the Trane employee who originally set up the customer admin. The e-mail will need to
be re-sent by this individual, which will contain a new activation link.
154 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Configuring Tracer SC for Tracer Summit BCU Data
Collection and Remote Connectivity
Tracer SCs without an application license (Base SC) can function as a Connectivity Module,
facilitating an interface to the Tracer Summit Workstation through Trane Connect as well as the
collection of BCU data.
To configure Tracer SC to collect data from a Tracer Summit BCU:
N o t e : This BCU feature is only supported on a Base SC (a Tracer SC without an application
license).
1. Install the Tracer SC-base at the customer site.
2. At the Tracer SC user interface, navigate to I n s t a l l a t i o n > I d e n t i f i c a t i o n a n d
C o m m u n i c a t i o n s > I n t e l l i g e n t S e r v i c e s . The B C U ( B M T W / X ) D a t a and R e m o t e
C o n n e c t i v i t y f o r T r a c e r S u m m i t fields will initially be disabled.
Figure 95. Intelligent Services screen
3. Click the E d i t button.

4. In the I n t e l l i g e n t S e r v i c e D a t a C o l l e c t i o n frame, select to enable B C U ( B M T W / X ) D a t a .
5. In the T r a n e C o n n e c t frame, confirm that Trane Connect is enabled; if not, select Enable.
6. Select the checkbox for E n a b l e R e m o t e C o n n e c t i v i t y f o r T r a c e r S u m m i t . (See Figure 96, p.
156)
.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 155
Configuring Tracer SC for Tracer Summit BCU Data Collection and Remote Connectivity
Figure 96. Intelligent Services (remote connectivity enabled)
B A C n e t n e t w o r k n u m b e r : This number defaults to 4. Change it only if there is another BACnet

device with the same number.
U D P p o r t f o r B A C n e t : The default is 47808. Typically, there is no need to change this number. It
does not need to match your BCU UDP port.
7. Click S a v e . You will be prompted to restart Tracer SC. Click O K .
8. Log in to MyBuilding.Trane.com.
9. Click on T I S C o m m a n d C e n t e r , then select S i t e A d m i n i s t r a t i o n .
10. In the C o n n e c t i o n T y p e drop-down, select S C / B C U .
11. Enter the information in the provided fields. A new tile is created in TIS Command Center and
equipment/data will be collected. (See Figure 97, p. 157).
156 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Configuring Tracer SC for Tracer Summit BCU Data Collection and Remote Connectivity
Figure 97. Intelligent Services Command Center Registration
12. Select S t a r t T r a n e C o n n e c t in TIS Command Center in order to use Tracer Summit remotely.
Enter the IP address and port listed on the Trane Connect screen.
N o t e : Do not use the BBMD IP and UDP port from the BCU.
13. Set up alarming on the BCU; configure Tracer SC as a workstation in Tracer Summit:
a. Navigate to S e t u p > S i t e C o n f i g u r a t i o n > D e v i c e s tab.
b. Select C r e a t e W o r k s t a t i o n . This enables Tracer SC as a workstation, so it can be set up to
receive alarms from the BCUs.
c. Navigate to S e t u p > S i t e C o n f i g u r a t i o n > E v e n t R e c e i v e r s .
d. Set up the Tracer SC Workstation in the E v e n t R e c e i v e r field.
N o t e : If you have systems that require mapping (programmable controller, chilled water system),
use TIS Command Center to perform the mapping. If you want the Tracer SC to receive
alarms from the BCU, you must configure the BCU to send alarms to the Tracer SC. These
alarms are then routed to Intelligent Services. For more information, refer to the Software
Interface Data Mapping for TIS Equipment How-to-Guide, BAS-SVU18.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 157
Tracer SC LonTalk UNVT and SVNT Support
LonTalk UNVT Support
Tracer SC V4.4 introduces a new LON integration feature, which allows Tracer SC to integrate
previously non-supported standard network variable types (SNVTs) and user defined network
variable types (UNVTs). Some LonTalk devices use proprietary (user-defined) network variables
that, prior to V4.4, were not possible to integrate into Tracer SC.
The U N V T M o r e O p t i o n s dialog in the Tracer SC user-interface is used to define a single UNVT
into one or many points as defined by the manufacturer of the LonTalk device. Specific
manufacturer product documentation that describes how the UNVT is defined is required.
Product documentation for a specific vendor’s UNVTs can typically be found in the following
places:
• The integration guide from the manufacturer
• Device Resource Files (DRF) on LonMark
• Industry or community discussion boards
UNVT Mapping Procedure

The U N V T M o r e O p t i o n s dialog is available when creating or modifying a LonTalk device
template. The following procedure describes how to use the U N V T M o r e O p t i o n s dialog.
1. On the E d i t D e v i c e T e m p l a t e - M a p t h e R e m a i n i n g P o i n t s i n t h e D e v i c e screen, search for
UNVTs (and previously unsupported SNVTs). These can be identified by the absence of a
drop-down box in the T r a c e r S C K e y column. In the figure below, nviManValue,
nviFlowOffset, nviShare, nvoShare, nvoCtlDataG, nvoData, and nvoError are all UNVTs.
2. Click the ellipse icon in the far-right column, which opens the U N V T M o r e O p t i o n s
dialog.
158 BAS-SVX31U-EN
The U N V T M o r e O p t i o n s dialog shows the raw value in hex in the U N V T I n f o r m a t i o n section.

The raw value is extremely helpful because it displays the data length of the point, and it allows
you to verify that the correct pieces of data are being used to create a point in Tracer SC. The raw
value is only read when starting the UNVT editor – it does not automatically refresh.
3. Using the vendor documentation that defines the UNVT, identify the point or points that must
be extracted from the UNVT. Some UNVTs will be short and may represent a single point;
other UNVTs may be very large and provide multiple points.
4. In the B y t e O f f s e t column select “not set” and then select the starting location of the first
point to be created in Tracer SC. A byte offset of 0 starts with the left-most byte of data with
sequential bytes moving left to right.
5. select the appropriate (data) type in the Type field. The Type field includes SNVTs and
proprietary data types. Based on the Byte Offset and Type that are defined, the raw bytes to
be used will be highlighted in yellow in the Raw Data (Hex) field. Proprietary data type have a
prefix of UNVT_. Some examples of UNVT_ data types are:
• UNVT_U08 Unsigned 8 bits
• UNVT_S08 Signed 8 bits
• UNVT_U16 Unsigned 16 bits
• UNVT_S16 Signed 16 bits
• UNVT_STATE_08 1 to 8 bits of data. Use the Bit Offset and Bit Length fields.
• UNVT_STATE_16 1 to 16 bits of data. Use the Bit Offset and Bit Length fields.
6. Select an existing Tracer SC key or click the ellipse icon to create a new key. A key
conversion may also be applied or created as needed.
7. Click S a v e M a p p i n g s , and continue the device template create/edit procedure.
The following figure shows an example of more complicated UNVT. This UNVT has many points,
which use a variety of types with standard and custom keys.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 159
SNVT Types Supported by Tracer SC

Standard Network Variable Types (SNVTs) facilitate interoperability by providing a well-defined
interface for communication between devices made by different manufacturers. Devices can be
installed in a network and connected to other devices by using network variables, providing the
data types match.
The following table contains SNVT types supported by Tracer® SC.
Table 12. Supported SVNT types (alphabetical)
SNVT Type SNVT Index
SNVT_ABS_HUMID 160
SNVT_AMP 1
SNVT_AMP_AC 139
SNVT_AMP_F 48
SNVT_AMP_MIL 2
SNVT_ANGLE_DEG 104
SNVT_BTU_F 67
SNVT_BTU_KILO 5
SNVT_BTU_MEGA 6
SNVT_CHLR_STATUS 127
SNVT_COUNT 8
SNVT_COUNT_F 51
SNVT_COUNT_INC 9
SNVT_COUNT_INC_F 52
160 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 12. Supported SVNT types (alphabetical) (continued)
SNVT_DEFR_MODE 120
SNVT_DEFR_STATE 122
SNVT_DEFR_TERM 121
SNVT_DENSITY_F 101
SNVT_ELEC_KWH 13
SNVT_ELEC_KWH_1 146
SNVT_ELEC_WHR 14
SNVT_ELEC_WHR_F 68
SNVT_ENTHALPY 153
SNVT_EVAP_STATE 118
SNVT_FLOW 15
SNVT_FLOW_F 53
SNVT_FLOW_P 161
SNVT_FREQ_F 75
SNVT_FREQ_HZ 76
SNVT_FREQ_KILOHZ 77
SNVT_HVAC_EMERG 103
SNVT_HVAC_MODE 108
SNVT_HVAC_OVERIDE 111
SNVT_HVAC_STATUS 112
SNVT_LENGTH 17
SNVT_LENGTH_F 54
SNVT_LENGTH_MIL 20
SNVT_LEV_CONT 21
SNVT_LEV_CONT_F 55
SNVT_LEV_DISC 22
SNVT_LEV_PERCENT 81
SNVT_LUX 79
SNVT_MASS_KILO 24
SNVT_MASS_MEGA 25
SNVT_MULTIPLIER 82
SVNT_OCCUPANCY 109
SNVT_PH_F 126
SNVT_POWER 27
SNVT_POWER_F 57
SNVT_POWER_KILO 28
SNVT_PPM 29
SNVT_PPM_F 58
BAS-SVX31U-EN 161
SNVT_PRESS 30
SNVT_PRESS_F 59
SNVT_PRESS_P 113
SNVT_PWR_FACT 98
SNVT_PWR_FACT_F 99
SNVT_RES 31
SNVT_RES_F 60
SNVT_RES_KILO 32
SNVT_RPM 102
SNVT_SETTING 117
SNVT_SOUND_DB 33
SNVT_SOUND_DB_F 61
SNVT_SPEED 34
SNVT_SPEED_F 62
SNVT_SPEED_MIL 35
SNVT_STATE 83
SNVT_STATE_64 165
SNVT_STR_ASC 36
SNVT_SWITCH 95
SNVT_TEMP_DIFF_P 147
SNVT_TEMP_F 63
SNVT_TEMP_P 105
SNVT_TEMP_SETPT 106
SNVT_THERM_MODE 119
SNVT_TIME_HOUR 124
SNVT_TIME_F 64
SNVT_TIME_MIN 123
SNVT_TIME_SEC 107
SNVT_TIME_STAMP 84
SNVT_TOD_EVENT 128
SNVT_TURBIDITY_F 144
SNVT_VOL 41
SNVT_VOL_F 65
SNVT_VOL_KILO 42
SNVT_VOLT 44
SNVT_VOLT_AC 138
SNVT_VOLT_F 66
SNVT_VOLT_KILO 46
162 BAS-SVX31U-EN
SNVT_VOLT_MIL 47
SNVT_STATE_64 165
Table 13. Supported SNVT types (arranged by index)
SNVT_AMP 1
SNVT_AMP_MIL 2
SNVT_BTU_KILO 5
SNVT_BTU_MEGA 6
SNVT_COUNT 8
SNVT_COUNT_INC 9
SNVT_HVAC_OVERIDE 11
SNVT_ELEC_KWH 13
SNVT_ELEC_WHR 14
SNVT_FLOW 15
SNVT_LENGTH 17
SNVT_LENGTH_MIL 20
SNVT_LEV_CONT 21
SNVT_LEV_DISC 22
SNVT_MASS_KILO 24
SNVT_MASS_MEGA 25
SNVT_POWER 27
SNVT_POWER_KILO 28
SNVT_PPM 29
SNVT_PRESS 30
SNVT_RES 31
SNVT_RES_KILO 32
SNVT_SOUND_DB 33
SNVT_SPEED 34
SNVT_SPEED_MIL 35
SNVT_STR_ASC 36
SNVT_VOL 41
SNVT_VOL_KILO 42
SNVT_VOLT 44
SNVT_VOLT_KILO 46
SNVT_VOLT_MIL 47
SNVT_AMP_F 48
BAS-SVX31U-EN 163
Table 13. Supported SNVT types (arranged by index) (continued)
SNVT_COUNT_F 51
SNVT_COUNT_INC_F 52
SNVT_FLOW_F 53
SNVT_LENGTH_F 54
SNVT_LEV_CONT_F 55
SNVT_POWER_F 57
SNVT_PPM_F 58
SNVT_PRESS_F 59
SNVT_RES_F 60
SNVT_SOUND_DB_F 61
SNVT_SPEED_F 62
SNVT_TEMP_F 63
SNVT_TIME_F 64
SNVT_VOL_F 65
SNVT_VOLT_F 66
SNVT_BTU_F 67
SNVT_ELEC_WHR_F 68
SNVT_FREQ_F 75
SNVT_FREQ_HZ 76
SNVT_FREQ_KILOHZ 77
SNVT_LUX 79
SNVT_LEV_PERCENT 81
SNVT_MULTIPLIER 82
SNVT_STATE 83
SNVT_TIME_STAMP 84
SNVT_SWITCH 95
SNVT_PWR_FACT 98
SNVT_PWR_FACT_F 99
SNVT_DENSITY_F 101
SNVT_RPM 102
SNVT_HVAC_EMERG 103
SNVT_ANGLE_DEG 104
SNVT_TEMP_P 105
SNVT_TEMP_SETPT 106
SNVT_TIME_SEC 107
SNVT_HVAC_MODE 108
SVNT_OCCUPANCY 109
SNVT_HVAC_STATUS 112
164 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 13. Supported SNVT types (arranged by index) (continued)
SNVT_PRESS_P 113
SNVT_SETTING 117
SNVT_EVAP_STATE 118
SNVT_THERM_MODE 119
SNVT_DEFR_MODE 120
SNVT_DEFR_TERM 121
SNVT_DEFR_STATE 122
SNVT_TIME_MIN 123
SNVT_TIME_HOUR 124
SNVT_PH_F 126
SNVT_CHLR_STATUS 127
SNVT_TOD_EVENT 128
SNVT_VOLT_AC 138
SNVT_AMP_AC 139
SNVT_TURBIDITY_F 144
SNVT_ELEC_KWH_1 146
SNVT_TEMP_DIFF_P 147
SNVT_ENTHALPY 153
SNVT_ABS_HUMID 160
SNVT_FLOW_P 161
SNVT_STATE_64 165
BAS-SVX31U-EN 165
Key Mapping and Enumerations for Unit Controllers
This section contains information necessary for installing unit controllers on a Tracer® SC.
Tracer UC400 Unit Controller Points

The following tables map Tracer SC user-display names to the most commonly used Tracer
UC400 points for the following applications:
• Constant-volume air-handling unit (CV AHU)
• Air-handling unit variable-air-volume (VAV AHU)
• 2-heat/2-cool (2H/2C)
• Fan-coil unit
• VAV box
Table 14. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: CV AHU applications
UC400 point
UC400 point name type Description
Space Temperature Local AI1
Space Temperature Setpoint Local AI2 Hardwired space temperature setpoint value
Discharge Air Temperature Local AI Hardwired discharge temperature sensor value
Mixed Air Temperature AI Hardwired mixed air temperature sensor value
Outdoor Air Temperature Local AI
Space Humidity Local AI
Cooling Valve AO Position of the cooling valve
Heating Valve AO Position of the heating valve
Outdoor Air Damper AO Position of the outdoor air damper
Temperature value the control system will maintain for the air
Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Active AV
leaving the discharge of the equipment
A BAS supplied temperature value that is compared with the

Economizer Enable Temperature Setpoint BAS AV outdoor air temperature to determine when the economizer
system should be enabled
BAS supplied position value of the outdoor air damper when the
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint BAS AV
minimum amount of outdoor air is required
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint Active AV
Unit controller supplied position value of the outdoor air

Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint Default AV damper when the minimum amount of outdoor air is required
and no other control source is available
Amount of time a unit will remain in occupied mode after a

Occupied Bypass Time AV
tenant override event has occurred
Occupied Cooling Setpoint AV
Occupied Heating Setpoint AV
Delta value applied to the space temperature setpoint to

Occupied Offset AV
calculate the occupied cooling and heating setpoints
Outdoor air temperature being used by the control system to

Outdoor Air Temperature Active AV
make control decisions
Outdoor Air Temperature BAS AV BAS supplied outdoor air temperature
Space Humidity Setpoint Active AV
166 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 14. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: CV AHU applications (continued)
UC400 point
Space Humidity Setpoint BAS AV BAS supplied space air humidity value
Space Humidity Setpoint Default AV
Space Temp Setpoint Default AV
Space temperature value being used by the unit controller to

Space Temperature Active AV
Space Temperature BAS AV BAS supplied space temperature value

Space Temperature Setpoint Active AV
Space Temperature Setpoint BAS AV BAS supplied space temperature setpoint value

Standby Offset AV
calculate the standby cooling and heating setpoints
The space temperature that a unit will maintain when in

Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint AV
unoccupied cooling mode

Unoccupied Heating Setpoint AV
unoccupied heating mode
Indicates if the mixed air temperature is below the low limit

Mixed Air Low Limit Cutout BI
setpoint
Supply Fan Status BI The measured state of the supply fan
Supply Fan Start Stop BO Commanded state of the supply fan hardware output
Dehumidification Mode BV
Fan Failure Reset BV Reset for supply fan failure diagnostics
Heat Cool Mode Active BV
Night Heat Cool BV
Outdoor Air Temperature Failure BV
Space Temperature Failure BV
Startup Delay Completed BV
Supply Fan Failure BV
Indicates if the unit is communicating with a parent device on

Communication Status MI
the BAS network
Enthalpy Mode MV
Heat Cool Mode Request MV The mode of operation the BAS is requesting for unit control
Heat Cool Mode Status MV The mode of operation the unit is currently in
Occupancy Request MV The mode of occupancy the BAS is requesting for unit control
Occupancy Status MV The mode of occupancy the unit is currently in
Table 15. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: VAV AHU applications
UC400 point
Space Temperature Setpoint Local AI2
Discharge Air Temperature Local AI Hardwired discharge temperature sensor value
BAS-SVX31U-EN 167
Table 15. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: VAV AHU applications (continued)
UC400 point
Duct Static Pressure Local AI
Mixed Air Temperature AI Hardwired mixed air temperature sensor value
Outdoor Air Temperature Local AI
Cooling Valve AO Position of the cooling valve
Heating Valve AO Position of the heating valve
Outdoor Air Damper AO Position of the outdoor air damper
Supply Fan Speed AO The supply fan speed value sent by unit to the fan controller
Discharge Air Cooling Setpoint Active AV
BAS supplied discharge air temperature setpoint when the unit

Discharge Air Cooling Setpoint BAS AV
is in cooling mode
Discharge Air Cooling Setpoint Default AV
Discharge Air Heating Setpoint Active AV
BAS supplied discharge air temperature setpoint when the unit

Discharge Air Heating Setpoint BAS AV
is in heating mode
Discharge Air Heating Setpoint Default AV
Temperature value the control system will maintain for the air
Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Active AV
leaving the discharge of the equipment
Static air pressure value in the supply duct being used by the
Duct Static Pressure Active AV
control system to make control decisions
Duct Static Pressure BAS AV BAS supplied static air pressure value in the supply duct
Static pressure value the control system will maintain for the air
Duct Static Pressure Setpoint Active AV
in the supply duct
BAS supplied static pressure value the control system will

Duct Static Pressure Setpoint BAS AV
maintain for the air in the supply duct
Duct Static Pressure Setpoint Default AV
A BAS supplied temperature value that is compared with the

Economizer Enable Temperature Setpoint BAS AV outdoor air temperature to determine when the economizer
system should be enabled
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint Active AV
BAS supplied position value of the outdoor air damper when the
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint BAS AV
minimum amount of outdoor air is required
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint Default AV
Amount of time a unit will remain in occupied mode after a

Occupied Bypass Time AV
tenant override event has occurred
Occupied Cooling Setpoint AV
Occupied Heating Setpoint AV

Occupied Offset AV
calculate the occupied cooling and heating setpoints
Outdoor air temperature being used by the control system to

Outdoor Air Temperature Active AV
Outdoor Air Temperature BAS AV BAS supplied outdoor air temperature
Mixed Air Low Limit Setpoint Default AV
168 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 15. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: VAV AHU applications (continued)
UC400 point

Space Temperature Active AV
Space Temperature BAS AV BAS supplied space temperature value

Space Temperature Setpoint BAS AV BAS supplied space temperature setpoint value

Standby Offset AV
calculate the standby cooling and heating setpoints

unoccupied cooling mode

unoccupied heating mode
Indicates if the mixed air temperature is below the low limit

Mixed Air Low Limit Cutout BI
setpoint
Supply Fan Status BI The measured state of the supply fan
Supply Fan Start Stop BO Commanded state of the supply fan hardware output
Heat Cool Mode Active BV
Night Heat Cool BV
Outdoor Air Temperature Failure BV
Space Temperature Failure BV
Startup Delay Completed BV
Supply Fan Failure BV
Supply Fan Failure Reset BAS BV
Indicates if the unit is communicating with a parent device on

Communication Status MI
the BAS network
Heat Cool Mode Request MV The mode of operation the BAS is requesting for unit control
Heat Cool Mode Status MV The mode of operation the unit is currently in
Occupancy Request MV The mode of occupancy the BAS is requesting for unit control
Occupancy Status MV The mode of occupancy the unit is currently in
Table 16. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: 2H/2C applications
UC400 point
Space Temperature Setpoint Local AI2 Hardwired space temperature setpoint value
The temperature of the air at the discharge opening of the

Discharge Air Temperature Active AI
equipment
Space CO2 Concentration Local AI
Maximum amount of reheat available to control space

Auxiliary Heat Control Request AV
temperature
BAS-SVX31U-EN 169
Table 16. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: 2H/2C applications (continued)
UC400 point
Cabinet Style AV Describes the cabinet style of the unit
Cool Type AV Describes the cooling type installed in the unit
Cooling Capacity Status AV Indicates the unit cooling capacity being utilized
Cooling Enable BAS AV Allows a BAS to control the unit cooling system
Maximum value allowed for the Cooling Temperature

Cooling Setpoint High Limit AV
Setpoint
Cooling Setpoint Low Limit AV Minimum value allowed for the Cooling Temperature Setpoint
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint BAS AV BAS supplied economizer position minimum setpoint value
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint Local AV Indicates the local economizer minimum position setpoint
Indicates the operating state of the waterside economizer

Economizer System Status AV
system
Temperature setpoint below which economizer mode can be

Economizer Temperature Enable Setpoint AV
used
Indicates the number of hours air has flowed through the

Filter Runtime Hours AV
filter
Filter Runtime Hours Setpoint AV The setpoint value used by the filter run hours calculation
Heat Primary Capacity Status AV Indicates the unit primary heating capacity being utilized
Maximum value allowed for the Heating Temperature

Heating Setpoint High Limit AV
Setpoint
Minimum value allowed for the Heating Temperature

Heating Setpoint Low Limit AV
Setpoint
Occupied Bypass Time AV Time an override of the occupancy mode will stay in effect
Occupied Offset AV Offset value used to calculate setpoints in occupied mode
Outdoor Air Damper Position Status AV Indicates the unit outside air damper position
Outdoor Air Temperature BAS AV BAS supplied outdoor air temperature sensor value
Preheat Type AV Describes the heating type installed in the unit
Reheat Type AV Describes the reheat type installed in the unit
Space CO2 Concentration Active AV Space CO2 concentration value being used for unit control
Space CO2 Concentration BAS AV BAS supplied space CO2 sensor value
Space Humidity Active AV The space humidity currently used for unit control
Space Humidity BAS AV BAS supplied space humidity sensor value
Space Temperature Active AV The space temperature currently used for unit control
Space Temperature BAS AV BAS supplied space air temperature sensor value
Space air temperature setpoint value being used for unit

control
Base value to calculate setpoints in occupied and standby

Space Temperature Setpoint BAS AV
modes
Standby Offset AV Offset value used to calculate setpoints in standby mode
Supply Fan Type AV Describes the supply fan type installed in the unit
170 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 16. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: 2H/2C applications (continued)
UC400 point
Unit Energy Demand AV Indicates the current heat/cool energy demand of the unit
Cooling temperature setpoint used for control in unoccupied

mode
Heating temperature setpoint used for control in unoccupied

mode
Occupancy Input BI
Cool Output 1 BO Indicates the commanded state of cooling output 1
Cool Output 2 BO Indicates the commanded state of cooling output 2
Heat Output 1 BO Indicates the commanded state of heating output 1
Heat Output 2 BO Indicates the commanded state of heating output 2
Cooling Fan Control Method BV Fan control method when the unit is in cooling mode
Cooling Fan Default Status BV The fan speed when the unit is in cooling mode
Diagnostic Reset Command BAS BV Command used to reset latching diagnostics
Filter Timer Reset BV Command the unit to reset the accumulated filter run hours
Heating Fan Control Method BV Fan control method when the unit is in heating mode
Heating Fan Default Status BV The fan speed when the unit is in heating mode
Communication Status MI Indicates if the unit is communicating with a parent device
Timed Override Status MI Timed override request or cancel from zone sensor
Economizer Airside Enable BAS MV Command the state of the airside economizer system
Economizer Type MV General description of the equipment economizer system
Emergency Override BAS MV Command the unit into an emergency mode of operation
Exhaust Return Fan Type MV Describes the exhaust or return fan type installed in the unit
Heat Cool Mode Request MV Command the unit to a specific application mode
Heat Cool Mode Status MV Indicates the current application mode of the equipment
Occupancy Request MV Command the unit to a specific occupancy mode
Occupancy Status MV Indicates the current occupancy mode of the unit
Outdoor Damper Status MV Indicates the state of the outdoor air damper
Unit Type MV General description of the equipment type classification
Table 17. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: Fan-coil unit applications
UC400 point
Space Temperature Setpoint Local AI2 Setpoint value from space mounted sensor device
Discharge Air Temperature AI Hardwired discharge temperature sensor value
Entering Water Temperature AI The temperature of water entering the unit
BAS-SVX31U-EN 171
Table 17. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: Fan-coil unit applications (continued)
UC400 point
Water Valve Position AO

temperature
Cooling Capacity Status AV Indicates the unit cooling capacity being utilized
Cooling Enable BAS AV Allows a BAS to control the unit cooling system
Cooling Setpoint High Limit AV Maximum value allowed for the Cooling Temperature Setpoint
Economizer Airside Enable BAS AV Command the state of the airside economizer system
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint BAS AV BAS supplied economizer position minimum setpoint value
Economizer Minimum Position Setpoint Local AV Indicates the local economizer minimum position setpoint
Temperature setpoint below which economizer mode can be

Economizer Temperature Enable Setpoint AV
used
The minimum position of outdoor air damper to start exhaust

Exhaust Enable Position AV
fan
Exhaust Return Fan Type AV Describes the exhaust or return fan type installed in the unit
Fan Speed Command AV Allows a BAS to override the local unit fan speed
Indicates the number of hours air has flowed through the

Filter Runtime Hours AV
filter
Filter Runtime Hours Setpoint AV The setpoint value used by the filter run hours calculation
Heat Output Secondary Status AV Indicates the amount of reheat provided by the unit

Setpoint
Heating Setpoint Low Limit AV Minimum value allowed for the Heating Temperature Setpoint
Outdoor Air Damper Position AV Indicates the unit outside air damper position
Outdoor Air Temperature Active AV The outdoor air temperature currently used for unit control
Outdoor Air Temperature BAS AV BAS supplied outdoor air temperature sensor value
Outdoor Damper Status AV Indicates the state of the outdoor air damper
Preheat Type AV Describes the heating type installed in the unit
Primary Heat Output AV Indicates the unit primary heating capacity being utilized
Reheat Capacity AV Indicates the unit reheat capacity being utilized
Source Temperature BAS AV Temperature of the air or water entering the unit
Space Humidity Active AV The space humidity currently used for unit control
Space Humidity BAS AV BAS supplied space humidity sensor value
172 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 17. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: Fan-coil unit applications (continued)
UC400 point
Space Temperature Setpoint Active Space air temperature setpoint value being used for unit
AV
control

modes
Unit Energy Demand AV Indicates the current heat/cool energy demand of the unit

mode

mode
Occupancy Input BI
ECM Fan Output BO
Fan Output BO
Heat Output 1 BO
Heat Output 2 BO
Heat Output 3 BO
Cooling Fan Default Status BV The fan speed when the unit is in cooling mode
Filter Timer Reset BV Command the unit to reset the accumulated filter run hours
Heating Fan Default Status BV The fan speed when the unit is in heating mode
Reset Diagnostic BV Command used to reset latching diagnostics
Supply Fan Switch Local Control BV Controls when the unit fan speed switch is used for control
Baseboard Heat Status MV Indicates the state of base board heating in the space
Defrost System Status MV Indicates the state of the unit defrost function
Dehumidification System Status MV Indicates the state of the unit dehumidification function
Economizer Type MV General description of the equipment economizer system
Water Valve Override MV Allows a user to command the position of the water valve
BAS-SVX31U-EN 173
Table 18. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: VAV box applications
UC400 point
Space Temperature Setpoint Local AI2 Setpoint value from space mounted sensor device
Discharge Air Temperature AI Temperature of the air leaving the unit
Pressure 1 AI
Supply Air Temperature Local AI
Air Valve Position Status AO The current position of the air valve
Water Valve Position AO
Air Flow Gain AV
Air Flow Measurement Offset AV
Air Flow Minimum Setpoint Active AV The minimum air flow that will be provided to the space
Air Flow Nominal Status AV Factory assigned air flow value based on unit size
Air Flow Override Percent AV Percent of air flow based on Air Flow Maximum Setpoint
Air Flow Setpoint Active AV Amount of air that the unit will to deliver to the space
Air Flow Setpoint Maximum AV Maximum air that may be provided when the supply air is cold
Air Flow Setpoint Maximum Heat AV Maximum air that may be provided when the supply air is hot
Air Flow Setpoint Minimum AV Minimum air that must be provided when the supply air is cold
Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Heat AV Minimum air that must be provided when the supply air is hot
Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Local Heat AV Minimum air flow setpoint when reheat is active
Minimum air supplied when supply air is cold and unit in

Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Standby AV
standby
Minimum air supplied when supply air is hot and unit in

Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Standby Heat AV
standby

temperature
Cooling Setpoint High Limit AV Maximum value allowed for the Cooling Temperature Setpoint
Discharge Air Flow AV The volume of air provided to the space
Heat Output Secondary Status AV Indicates the amount of reheat provided by the unit

Setpoint
Heating Setpoint Low Limit AV Minimum value allowed for the Heating Temperature Setpoint
Preheat Type AV Describes the heating type installed in the unit.
174 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 18. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: VAV box applications (continued)
UC400 point
Space CO2 Concentration BAS AV BAS supplied space CO2 sensor value
Space CO2 Limit AV CO2 concentration limit where CO2 demand ventilation ends
CO2 concentration limit where CO2 demand ventilation

Space CO2 Low Limit AV
begins
Space air temperature setpoint value being used for unit

control

modes
Supply Air Temperature Active AV
Supply Air Temperature BAS AV Temperature of the air or water entering the unit

mode

mode
Ventilation Ratio AV The ratio of the ventilation setpoint to actual air flow
Ventilation Ratio Limit BAS AV The maximum ventilation ratio used for air flow control
Ventilation Setpoint Active AV The ventilation setpoint calculated by the unit
Ventilation Setpoint BAS AV The ventilation or air flow setpoint provided by the BAS
Ventilation Setpoint Local AV The ventilation or air flow setpoint for stand alone operation
Ventilation Standby Setpoint AV The ventilation or air flow setpoint for stand by operation
Occupancy Input BI
ECM Fan Output BO
Fan Output BO
Heat Output 1 BO
Heat Output 2 BO
Heat Output 3 BO
Diagnostic: Air Flow Override Local BV Binary point for alarming.
Diagnostic: Flow Sensor Calibration Failure BV Binary point for alarming.
Diagnostic: Flow Sensor Failure BV Binary point for alarming.
Diagnostic: Low Primary Air Flow BV Binary point for alarming.
Diagnostic: High Air Flow BV Binary point for alarming.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 175
Table 18. Tracer UC400 unit controller points: VAV box applications (continued)
UC400 point
Air Flow Minimum Setpoint Source MV The application providing the air flow minimum setpoint value
Air Flow Override MV Allows a user to override the air valve to a desired flow
Water Valve Override MV Allows a user to command the position of the water valve
Tracer MP501 Unit Controller Points

The following table provides network variable information for an MP501 and serves as a guide
for Tracer SC key mapping. Determine the configuration used in the MP501 and map the
appropriate network variables.
Table 19. Network variable information and key mapping guide for the Tracer MP501 multi-purpose controller
MP501 configured for:
Point Type
Tempera- Pres- Flo- Per- NV Created in
ture sure w cent PPM NV Name SNVT Type Index Tracer SC Key Tracer SC
* * * * * nvoStage1 SNVT_switch 27 Generic Stage 1 Status BI
* * * * * nvoStage2 SNVT_switch 28 Generic Stage 1 Status BI
nvoOutput- SNVT_lev_ Generic Output Percent

* * * * * 29 AI
Percent percent Status
nvoRelayS-
X X X X X SNVT_switch 30 Generic Relay Status BI
tate
Generic Binary Input

X X X X X nvoBI1State SNVT_switch 31 BI
Status
nviLoopEna- Generic Loop Enable

X X X X X SNVT_switch 32 BO
ble BAS
nviCmdO- SNVT_lev_ Generic Output

X X X X X 33 AO
verride percent Override BAS
nviRelayO- Generic Relay Override

X X X X X SNVT_switch 34 BO
verride BAS
nviSetptPer- SNVT_lev_ Generic Percent

X 35 AO
cent percent Setpoint BAS
Generic Flow Setpoint

X nviSetptFlow SNVT_flow 36 AO
BAS
nviSetpoint- SNVT_press_ Generic Pressure

X 37 AO
Pressure p Setpoint BAS
SNVT_temp_ Generic Temperature

X nviSetptTemp 38 AO
p Setpoint BAS
176 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 19. Network variable information and key mapping guide for the Tracer MP501 multi-purpose controller
(continued)
MP501 configured for:
Point Type
Tempera- Pres- Flo- Per- NV Created in
ture sure w cent PPM NV Name SNVT Type Index Tracer SC Key Tracer SC
Generic PPM Setpoint

X nviSetptPPM SNVT_ppm 39 AO
BAS
nvoInputPer- SNVT_lev_ Generic Input Percent

X 40 AI
cent percent Status
Generic Input Flow

X nvoInputFlow SNVT_flow 41 AI
Status
nvoInput- SNVT_press_ Generic Input Pressure

X 42 AI
Pressure p Status
nvoInput- SNVT_temp_ Generic Input

X 43 AI
Temp p Temperature Status
Generic Input PPM

X nvoInputPPM SNVT_ppm 44 AI
Status
nviInputPer- SNVT_lev_
X 45 Generic Percent BAS AO
cent percent
X nviInputFlow SNVT_flow 46 Generic Flow BAS AO
nviInputPres- SNVT_press_
X 47 Generic Pressure BAS AO
sure p
SNVT_temp_ Generic Temperature

X nviInputTemp 48 AO
p BAS
X nviInputPPM SNVT_ppm 49 Generic PPM BAS AO
Note: Available based on MP501 output configuration.
Tracer MP503 Unit Controller Points

The following table provides network variable information for an MP503 and serves as a guide
for Tracer SC key mapping.
Table 20. Network variable information and key mapping guide for the Tracer MP503 input/output module
Point Type
Created in
NV Name SNVT Type NV Index Tracer SC Key Tracer SC
nviBOP1Request UNVT_switch_binary 1 Binary Output Request 1 BO
nviBOP1Override UNVT_switch_binary 5 Binary Output Override 1 BO
nvoTemperature1 SNVT_temp_p 14 Temperature 1 AI
BAS-SVX31U-EN 177
Table 20. Network variable information and key mapping guide for the Tracer MP503 input/output module
(continued)
Point Type
Created in
NV Name SNVT Type NV Index Tracer SC Key Tracer SC
nvoBIP1Status UNVT_switch_binary 18 Binary Input Status 1 BI
nvoCurrent1 SNVT_amp_mil 22 Current 1 AI
nvoVolts1 SNVT_volt 26 Voltage 1 AI
nvoBOP1Status UNVT_switch_binary 30 Binary Output Status 1 BI
Tracer SC Enumerations
Table 21. Tracer SC enumerations
Tracer SC Point Name Enumerations and State Text
1 = Front Panel
2 = External
Active Base Loading Setpoint Source
3 = Ice
4 = BAS
1 = Front Panel
2 = External
Active Chilled Water Setpoint Source
3 = Ice
4 = BAS
1 = Front Panel
2 = External
Active Current Limit Setpoint Source
3 = Ice
4 = BAS
1 = Front Panel
2 = External
Active Hot Water Setpoint Source
3 = Ice
4 = BAS
false = Inactive
Add Input
true = Active
false = Inactive
Add Request Exist
true = Active
178 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Table 21. Tracer SC enumerations (continued)

1 = Occupied
2 = Unoccupied
3 = Optimal Start
4 = Humidity Pulldown
5 = Optimal Stop
AHU Mode Request
6 = Unoccupied Heating/Cooling
7 = Night Purge
8 = Unoccupied Humidify
9 = Unoccupied Dehumidify
10 = Unknown Operating Mod
1 = None (no min enforced)

2 = Cooling Minimum
3 = Heating Minimum
4 = Local Heating Minimum
Air Flow Minimum Setpoint Source
5 = Standby Cooling Minimum
6 = Standby Heating Minimum
7 = Derived from Ventilation Requirements
8 = Pressure Dependent Mode Min
1 = Air Valves Auto Control

2 = Not Used
3 = Not Used
4 = Not Used
Air Flow Override
5 = Air Valves Full Open
6 = Air Valves Full Closed
7 = Air Valves Minimum Setpoint
8 = Air Valves Maximum Setpoint
false = pressure independent control

Air Valve Position Control
true = position control/pressure dependent
false = De-energized
Alarm Relay Output Status
true = Energized
false = None
All Chillers Are Unavailable
true = Failure
false = None
All Chillers Have Failed
true = Failure
false = Disabled
Ambient Temperature Lockout Active
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Ambient Temperature Lockout Function
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Auto Calibration Enabled
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Auto Commissioning Active
true = Enabled
false = Cancel
Auto Commissioning Command
true = Start
1 = Waiting
2 = Calibrating
3 = Flow Test
Auto Commissioning State 4 = Fan Test
5 = Reheat Test
6 = Finished
7 = Canceled
false = Unavailable
Available
true = Available
false = Inactive
Base Loading Active
true = Active
false = Auto
Base Loading Auto/On Request BAS
true = On
BAS-SVX31U-EN 179

1 = Off
Baseboard Heat Status 2 = On
3 = Not Present
false = Disabled
Binary Member Control Function
true = Enabled
false = Normal
Boiler Pump 1 Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
Boiler Pump 1 Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Normal
Boiler Pump 1 Reset BAS
true = Reset
false = Off
Boiler Pump 1 Start Stop Output
true = On
false = Normal
Boiler Pump 1 VFD Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
Bypass Chilled Water System Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Inactive
Calibration Active
true = Active
false = Not Limited

Capacity Limited
true = Limited
false = No Flow
Chilled Water Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
Chilled Water Pump 1 Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
Chilled Water Pump 1 Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Normal
Chilled Water Pump 1 Reset BAS
true = Reset
false = Off
Chilled Water Pump 1 Start Stop Output
true = On
180 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = Normal
Chilled Water Pump 1 VFD Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Closed
Chilled Water Valve Status
true = Open
false = No Flow
Chiller 1 Chilled Water Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Off
Chiller 1 Pump Request BAS
true = On
false = Off
Chiller 1 Pump Request Local
true = On
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
BAS-SVX31U-EN 181

false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Stop
Chiller Auto Stop Command
true = Auto
false = Stop
Chiller Auto Stop Command BAS
true = Auto
1 = Stop
Chiller Auto Stop Command Multistate BAS
2 = Auto
false = Unavailable
Chiller Available
true = Available
1 = No Failures
2 = Failed To Command Chiller Pump On
3 = Failed To Confirm Chilled Water Flow
4 = Failed To Command Chiller On
5 = Failed To Confirm Chiller Running. Chiller Plant Reset Required
6 = Failed To Command Chiller Off
Chiller Failure
7 = Failed To Confirm Chiller Off
8 = Failed To Command Chiller Pump Off
9 = Failed To Confirm Chiller Chilled Water Flow Off
10 = Chiller Manual Reset Active
11 = Optional Chiller Failure Input Active
12 = Communication Lost
false = None
Chiller Failure Exists
true = Failure
false = None
Chiller Failure Reset
true = Failure
false = Normal
Chiller Lockout
true = Lockout
false = None
Chiller Manual Reset Active
true = Failure
1 = Cooling
2 = Heating
Chiller Mode Command BAS
3 = Ice Building
4 = Free Cool
false = Disabled
Chiller Plant Enable
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Chiller Plant Pump Request
true = Enabled
false = Off
Chiller Pump 1 Status
true = Running
false = Off
Chiller Pump 2 Status
true = Running
false = Off
Chiller Running State
true = On
1 = BAS
Chiller Setpoint Source 2 = External
3 = Front Panel
false = Inactive
Chillers Running Out of Sequence
true = Active
false = Disabled
Circuit 1 Enable
true = Enabled
182 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = Disabled
Circuit 2 Enable
true = Enabled
false = None
Communication Lost
true = Failure
1 = Not Communicating
2 = No Logical Device Connected
Communication Status
3 = Communicating
4 = Startup
false = Off
Compressor 1A Status
true = Running
1 = Off
2 = Running
Compressor 1A Status 3 = Alarm
Note: This enumeration is only valid for UC800 controllers.
false = Off
Compressor 1B Status
true = Running
1 = Off
2 = Running
Compressor 1B Status 3 = Alarm
false = Off
Compressor 1C Status
true = Running
1 = Off
2 = Running
Compressor 1C Status 3 = Alarm
false = Off
Compressor 2A Status
true = Running
1 = Off
2 = Running
Compressor 2A Status 3 = Alarm
false = Off
Compressor 2B Status
true = Running
1 = Off
2 = Running
Compressor 2B Status 3 = Alarm
false = Off
Compressor 2C Status
true = Running
1 = Off
2 = Running
Compressor 2C Status 3 = Alarm
false = Disable
Compressor Lead Lag Enable Command
true = Enable
false = Normal
Compressor Lockout Status
true = Locked out
false = Off
Condenser Fan 1 Circuit 1 Status
true = Running
false = Off
true = Running
BAS-SVX31U-EN 183

false = Off
true = Running
false = Off
true = Running
false = Off
true = Running
false = Off
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan A Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan B Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan C Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan Circuit 1 Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan Circuit 2 Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan D Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan E Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan F Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan G Status
true = Running
false = Off
Condenser Fan H Status
true = Running
false = Normal
Condenser Pump 1 Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
Condenser Pump 1 Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Normal
Condenser Pump 1 Reset BAS
true = Reset
false = Off
Condenser Pump 1 Start Stop Output
true = On
false = Normal
Condenser Pump 1 VFD Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
184 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
1 = None
2 = Air Cooled Condenser
Condenser Type
3 = Water Cooled Condenser
4 = Evaporative Condenser
1 = Flow
Condenser Water Flow BAS 2 = No Flow
3 = Auto
false = No Flow
Condenser Water Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Off
Condenser Water Pump Request
true = On
false = Off
Condenser Water Pump Status
true = On
1 = Off
Cool Output 1 2 = On
3 = Not Present
Cool Output 1 Status
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
false = Off
Cool Output 2 Status
true = On
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
BAS-SVX31U-EN 185

1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = No Default
2 = Off
3 = Low
4 = Undefined
5 = Medium
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = Not Used
Cooling Fan Default Status 9 = High
10 = Not Used
11 = Not Used
12 = Not Used
13 = Not Used
14 = Not Used
15 = Not Used
16 = Not Used
17 = Auto
false = Cycling
Cooling Fan Operation Default
true = Continuous
1 = None
2 = Outdoor Air
Cooling Reset Type Status
3 = Zone
4 = Return Air
1 = Water Cooled
Cooling Type
2 = Air Cooled
1 = Disabled
2 = Waiting To Add
3 = Waiting To Subtract
4 = Starting Chiller
5 = Shutting Off Chiller
Current Operation
6 = Start Interval Active
7 = No Changes Needed
8 = System Chilled Water Request Active
9 = In Second Step
10 = Second Step Shutting Off Chiller
false = Disable
Daytime Warmup Enable Command
true = Enable
false = Disable
Dehumidification Command
true = Enable
false = Disable
Dehumidification Reheat Control
true = Enable
false = Off
Dehumidification Status
true = On
1 = Off
Dehumidification System Status 2 = On
3 = Not Present
1 = Unit Is Running
2 = Stopped By Alarm
3 = Stopped By BMS
Detailed Chiller Status 4 = Stopped By Clock
5 = Stopped By External Signal
6 = Stopped By Operator
7 = Oil Cycle Running
false = Inactive
Diagnostic Alarm Present
true = Active
186 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = Normal
Diagnostic Condensate Overflow
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
Diagnostic Present
true = In Alarm
false = Inactive
Diagnostic Present true = Active
Note: This enumeration is only valid for the Area system point.
false = Normal
Diagnostic Shutdown Present
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
Dirty Filter Alarm
true = In Alarm
false = °C
Display Temperature Scale
true = °F
false = Normal
Drive Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = Off
Drive Motor Status
true = On
1 = Active
2 = Disabled
3 = No VAV Data
4 = In Test
Duct Static Optimization
5 = Maximum Heat
6 = Air Handler Off
7 = Air Valve Closed
8 = Unknown Status
Duct Static Optimization Function false = Inactive

true = Active
ECM Fan Output Status false = Off

true = On
1 = Disabled
Economizer Airside Enable Command 2 = Enabled
3 = Auto
1 = Absolute Temperature
2 = Relative Temperature
Economizer Decision Method
3 = Absolute Enthalpy
4 = Comparative Enthalpy
false = Enable
Economizer Minimum Position Enable Command
true = Disable
false = Disabled
Economizer Status
true = Enabled
1 = Disabled
Economizer System Status 2 = Enabled
3 = Not Present
1 = None
2 = 2 Position Ventilation
3 = Modulation Economizer
4 = 2 Position Ventilation/Waterside Economizer
5 = Waterside Economizer
Economizer Type
6 = Airside/Waterside Economizer
7 = TRAQ Damper
8 = Airside Economizer and TRAQ Damper/Sensor
9 = Waterside Economizer and TRAQ Damper/Sensor
10 = Airside/Waterside Economizer and TRAQ Damper/Sensor
1 = Disabled
Economizer Waterside Enable Command 2 = Enabled
3 = Auto
BAS-SVX31U-EN 187

false = Normal
Electric Heat Timer Reset
true = Reset
false = Off
Emergency Heat Status
true = On
1 = Normal
2 = Pressurize
3 = Depressurize
Emergency Override Command
4 = Purge
5 = Shutdown
6 = Fire
false = Off
Emergency Stop
true = On
false = Inactive
Energy Recovery Frost Avoidance Status
true = Active
false = Inactive
Energy Recovery Preheat Status
true = Active
false = Inactive
Energy Recovery Status
true = Active
false = Disabled
Enforce Minimum Setpoint Differential
true = Enabled
false = No Flow
Evaporator Water Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Off
Evaporator Water Pump Request
true = On
false = Normal
Exhaust Fan Failure
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
Exhaust Fan Failure Reset
true = Reset
1 = Off
Exhaust Fan Output 2 = On
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
Exhaust Fan Proving Status 2 = On
3 = Not Present
false = Off
Exhaust Fan Status
true = On
false = None
Fail Chiller On Alarm
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Command Chiller Off
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Command Chiller On
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Command Chiller Pump Off
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Command Chiller Pump On
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Command System Pump Off
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Command System Pump On
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Confirm Chilled Water Flow Off
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Confirm Chilled Water Flow On
true = Failure
188 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = None
Failed To Confirm Chiller Off
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Confirm Chiller Running
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Confirm System Chilled Water Flow Off
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Confirm System Chilled Water Flow On
true = Failure
false = None
Failed To Read Bypass Flow
true = Failure
1 = On
Fan Mode BAS 2 = Auto
3 = Smart
false = Off
Fan Output Status
true = On
1 = Zero
2 = One
Fan Speeds Configured 3 = Two
4 = Three
5 = Variable Speed
false = Normal
Filter Timer Reset
true = Reset
1 = Clean
Final Filter Status 2 = Dirty
3 = Not Present
false = Disabled
Forced Rotation Enabled
true = Enabled
1 = Stop
Front Panel Auto Stop Status
2 = Auto
false = Auto
Front Panel Base Loading Command
true = On
1 = Cooling
2 = Heating
Front Panel Chiller Mode
3 = Ice Building
4 = Free Cool
1 = Off
Frost Detection Input 2 = On
3 = Not Present
false = Off
Generic Binary Input Status
true = On
false = Off
Generic Binary Input Status 1
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
Generic Binary Output Override 1
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
BAS-SVX31U-EN 189

false = Off
true = On
false = Off
Generic Binary Output Request
true = On
false = Off
Generic Binary Output Request 1
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
Generic Binary Output Status
true = On
false = Off
Generic Binary Output Status 1
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
true = On
1 = Auto
2 = Heat
3 = Morning Warm-up
4 = Cool
5 = Night Purge
6 = Pre Cool
7 = Off
8 = Test
Generic Heat Cool Mode Request
9 = Emergency Heat
10 = Fan Only
11 = Free Cool
12 = Ice-Making
13 = Max Heat
14 = Economizer
15 = Dehumidify
16 = Calibrate
1 = Auto
2 = Heat
3 = Morning Warm-up
4 = Cool
5 = Night Purge
6 = Pre Cool
7 = Off
8 = Test
Generic Heat Cool Mode Status
9 = Emergency Heat
10 = Fan Only
11 = Free Cool
12 = Ice-Making
13 = Max Heat
14 = Economizer
15 = Dehumidify
16 = Calibrate
false = Off
Generic Loop Enable BAS
true = On
false = Off
Generic Relay Override BAS
true = On
false = Off
Generic Relay Status
true = On
190 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = Off
Generic Stage 1 Status
true = On
false = Off
Generic Stage 2 Status
true = On
1 = Off
Generic State Input 1 2 = On
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
Generic State Output 1 2 = On
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
false = Off
Head Relief Request
true = On
BAS-SVX31U-EN 191

1 = Auto
2 = Heat
3 = Morning Warm-up
4 = Cool
5 = Night Purge
6 = Pre Cool
7 = Off
8 = Test
Heat Cool Mode Request
9 = Emergency Heat
10 = Fan Only
11 = Free Cool
12 = Ice-Making
13 = Max Heat
14 = Economizer
15 = Dehumidify
16 = Calibrate
1 = Auto
2 = Heat
3 = Morning Warm-up
4 = Cool
5 = Night Purge
6 = Pre Cool
7 = Off
8 = Test
Heat Cool Mode Status
9 = Emergency Heat
10 = Fan Only
11 = Free Cool
12 = Ice-Making
13 = Max Heat
14 = Economizer
15 = Dehumidify
16 = Calibrate
1 = Off
Heat Output 1 2 = On
3 = Not Present
Heat Output 1 Status false = Off

true = On
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
false = Off
Heat Output 2 Status
true = On
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
false = Off
Heat Output 3 Status
true = On
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
3 = Not Present
192 BAS-SVX31U-EN

1 = Auto
2 = Heat
3 = Morning Warm-up
4 = Cool
5 = Night Purge
6 = Pre Cool
7 = Off
8 = Test
9 = Emergency Heating
Heat/Cool Mode Request 10 = Fan Only
11 = Economizing
12 = Ice Making
13 = Maximum Heat
14 = Economy
15 = Dehumidify
16 = Calibrate
17 = Emergency Cool
18 = Emergency Heat
19 = Humidify
1 = Auto
2 = Heat
3 = Morning warm-up
4 = Cool
5 = Night Purge
6 = Pre Cool
7 = Off
8 = Test
Heat/Cool Mode Status
9 = Emergency Heating
10 = Fan Only
11 = Free Cool
12 = Ice-Making
13 = Max Heat
14 = Economizer
15 = Dehumidify
16 = Calibrate
false = Cycling
Heating Fan Default Status
true = Continuous
false = Normal
Heating Fan Operation Default
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
High Static Alarm
true = In Alarm
false = Inactive
Hot Gas Bypass Active
true = Active
false = Normal
Hot Water Pump 1 Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
Hot Water Pump 1 Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Normal
Hot Water Pump 1 Reset BAS
true = Reset
false = Off
Hot Water Pump 1 Start Stop Output
true = On
false = Normal
Hot Water Pump 1 VFD Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
BAS-SVX31U-EN 193

false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Closed
Hot Water Valve Status
true = Open
false = Disable
Humidification Command
true = Auto
false = Disabled
Humidity Pulldown Can Occur
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Humidity Pulldown Function
true = Enabled
false = Not in Defrost

In Defrost
true = Defrost
false = Disabled
Include In Calculation Function
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Include In Dehumidify Function
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Include In Economize Function
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Include In Humidify Function
true = Enabled
false = No
Is Equipment
true = Yes
1 = Setpoint, Mode, Fan, TOV

2 = Setpoint, Mode, Fan
3 = Setpoint, TOV
Keypad Lockout
4 = Setpoint Only
5 = TOV Only
6 = No Access
false = Off
Light 1 Request BAS
true = On
false = Off
Light 1 Request Local
true = On
false = Off
Light 1 Status
true = On
false = Off
Light 2 Request BAS
true = On
false = Off
Light 2 Request Local
true = On
false = Off
Light 2 Status
true = On
false = Remote control

Local Setpoint Control
true = Local control
194 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = Normal
Low Temperature Alarm
true = In Alarm
false = Off
Maintenance Ping
true = On
false = Off
Manual Override Exists
true = On
false = Inactive
Manual Reset Present
true = Active
1 = Field Applied
2 = La Crosse
3 = Pueblo
4 = Charmes
5 = Rushville
6 = Macon
7 = Waco
8 = Lexington
9 = Forsyth
Manufacturing Location
10 = Clarksville
11 = Ft. Smith
12 = Penang
13 = Colchester
14 = Curitiba
15 = Taicang
16 = Taiwan
17 = Epinal
18 = Golbey
false = Off
Maximum Capacity
true = On
1 = RTA
2 = CVH
3 = CVG
4 = CVR
5 = CDH
6 = RTH
7 = CGW
8 = CGA
Model Information
9 = CCA
10 = RTW
11 = RTX
12 = RTU
13 = CCU
14 = CXA
15 = CGC
16 = RAU
false = Disable
Morning Warmup Enable Command
true = Enable
1 = Communications
2 = Communication Loss
MP Communication Status
3 = Failed to Establish
4 = Waiting To Establish
false = Disabled
Night Purge Economizing Referencer Input
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Night Purge Enable
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Night Purge Function
true = Enabled
false = Off
Noise Reduction Active
true = On
false = Normal
Noise Reduction Request BAS
true = Reduce Noise
BAS-SVX31U-EN 195

false = Occupied
Occupancy Input
true = Unoccupied
1 = Occupied
2 = Unoccupied
Occupancy Request 3 = Occupied Bypass
4 = Occupied Standby
5 = Auto
1 = Occupied
2 = Unoccupied
3 = Bypass
Occupancy Request 4 = Standby
5 = Unknown
Note: This enumeration is only valid for the Area system point.
1 = Occupied
2 = Unoccupied
Occupancy Status 3 = Occupied Bypass
4 = Occupied Standby
5 = Auto
1 = Occupied
2 = Unoccupied
3 = Bypass
Occupancy Status 4 = Standby
5 = Unknown
Note: This enumeration is only valid for the Area and VAS system
point.
false = Off
Occupant Call
true = On
1 = Cooling
2 = Heating
Operating Mode 3 = Ice Building
4 = Free Cool
Note: This enumeration os only valid for chillers.
1 = Occupied
2 = Unoccupied
3 = Optimal Start
5 = Optimal Stop
Operating Mode 7 = Night Purge
10 = Unknown Operating Mode
Note: This enumeration is only valid for the Area and VAS system
point.
1 = Disabled
2 = Disabling
3 = Dispatch
4 = Turning System Water Request On
5 = Waiting for System Chilled Water Flow
6 = Unload
7 = Turning Chiller Pump On
Operating Status 8 = Waiting for Chiller Chilled Water Flow On
9 = Turning Chiller On
10 = Verifying Chiller On
11 = Turning Chiller Off
12 = Verifying Chiller Off
13 = Turning Chiller Pump Off
14 = Turning System Water Request Off
15 = Verifying System Chilled Water Flow Off
false = Disabled
Optimal Start Can Occur
true = Enabled
196 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = Disabled
Optimal Stop Can Occur
true = Enabled
false = None
Optional Chiller Failure Input Active
true = Failure
1 = At or Below Minimum Position

Outdoor Air Damper Status 2 = Above Minimum Position
3 = Not Present
false = Disabled
Outdoor Air Temperature Compensation
true = Enabled
1 = Constant Flow - Water always flows through all chillers (Subtract

on Temperature)
2 = Constant Flow - Water always flows through all chillers (Subtract
on Capacity)
3 = Variable Flow - Water flows though running chillers only (Subtract
on Temperature)
4 = Variable Flow - Water flows though running chillers only (Subtract
Plant Type on Capacity)
5 = Decoupled System (Primary-Secondary) - Water flows through
running chillers only (Subtract on Temperature)
running chillers only (Subtract on Flow)
running chillers only (Subtract on Capacity)
8 = Variable Primary Flow - Variable water flows through chillers
false = Normal
Power Failure Recovery Function
true = Rapid
1 = Clean
Prefilter Status 2 = Dirty
3 = Not Present
false = Closed
PreHeat Valve Status
true = Open
false = Normal
Primary Chilled Water Pump 1 Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
Primary Chilled Water Pump 1 Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Normal
Primary Chilled Water Pump 1 Reset BAS
true = Reset
false = Off
Primary Chilled Water Pump 1 Start Stop Output
true = On
false = Normal
Primary Chilled Water Pump 1 VFD Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
BAS-SVX31U-EN 197

false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
1 = Clean
Primary Filter Status 2 = Dirty
3 = Not Present
false = Off
Pump Out Relay Circuit 1
true = On
false = Off
Pump Out Relay Circuit 2
true = On
false = Off
Purge Compressor Relay Circuit 1
true = On
false = Off
Purge Compressor Relay Circuit 2
true = On
false = Off
Purge Regenerating Valve Solenoid Circuit 1
true = On
false = Off
Purge Regenerating Valve Solenoid Circuit 2
true = On
1 = R-11
2 = R-12
3 = R-22
4 = R-123
5 = R-134A
6 = R-407C
Refrigerant Type
7 = R-410A
8 = R-113
9 = R-114
10 = R-500
11 = R-502
12 = R-404A
false = Closed
ReHeat Valve Status
true = Open
1 = No Release
2 = Temperature setpoint release
Release Overrides 3 = Fan speed command release
4 = Occupant call release
5 = Release all overrides
0 = None
Request Pending 1 = Add
2 = Subtract
198 BAS-SVX31U-EN

1 = Occupied
2 = Unoccupied
3 = Optimal Start
5 = Optimal Stop
Requested Operating Mode
7 = Night Purge
10 = Unknown Mode
Reset Diagnostic false = Normal

true = Reset
false = Normal
Return Fan Failure
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
Return Fan Failure Reset
true = In Alarm
1 = Off
Return Fan Output 2 = On
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
Return Fan Proving Status 2 = On
3 = Not Present
false = Off
Return Fan Status
true = On
false = Denergized
Reversing Valve
true = Energized
1 = Heating
Reversing Valve Status 2 = Cooling
3 = Not Present
false = Inactive
Rotation Input
true = Active
false = Run Not Enabled

Run Enabled
true = Run Enabled
1 = Chiller Off
2 = Chiller In Start Mode
Running Mode 3 = Chiller In Run Mode
4 = Chiller In Pre-Shutdown Mode
5 = Chiller In Service Mode
false = Normal
Secondary Chilled Water Pump 1 Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
Secondary Chilled Water Pump 1 Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Normal
Secondary Chilled Water Pump 1 Reset BAS
true = Reset
false = Off
Secondary Chilled Water Pump 1 Start Stop Output
true = On
false = Normal
Secondary Chilled Water Pump 1 VFD Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
BAS-SVX31U-EN 199

false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Disabled
Send Allow VAV Auxillary Heat at Night
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Send VAV Drive Max to VAV Boxes
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Send VAV Source Temperature To VAV Boxes
true = Enabled
false = No
Series Chiller Plant
true = Yes
1 = Inactive
2 = Fan On
3 = IGV Open
4 = IGV Closed
5 = Min Vent
6 = Econ Open
7 = Cool 1
8 = Cool 2
Service Test Status
9 = Cool 3
10 = Dehumidification/Reheat
11 = Heat 1
12 = Heat 2
13 = Heat 3
14 = Heat 4
15 = Defrost
16 = Emergency Heat
false = Inactive
Service Test Mode Status
true = Active
false = Disabled
Soft Start Function
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Space Temperature Setpoint Use Local
true = Enabled
false = Inactive
Subtract Input
true = Active
false = Inactive
Subtract Request Exist
true = Active
200 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = Close
Sunblind 1 Request BAS
true = Open
false = Close
Sunblind 1 Request Local
true = Open
false = Close
Sunblind 1 Status
true = Open
false = Close
Sunblind 2 Request BAS
true = Open
false = Close
Sunblind 2 Request Local
true = Open
false = Close
Sunblind 2 Status
true = Open
false = Disable
Supply Air Tempering Enable Command
true = Enable
false = Disable
Supply Air Tempering Status
true = Enable
false = Cycling
Supply Fan Configuration Status
true = Continuous
false = Normal
Supply Fan Failure
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
Supply Fan Failure Reset
true = Reset
false = Cycling
Supply Fan Mode Command
true = Continuous
1 = Off
Supply Fan Output 2 = On
3 = Not Present
1 = Off
Supply Fan Proving Status 2 = On
3 = Not Present
1 = Auto
2 = Off
Supply Fan Speed Setpoint BAS 3 = Low
4 = Medium
5 = High
1 = Auto
2 = Off
Supply Fan Speed Setpoint Local 3 = Low
4 = Medium
5 = High
1 = Auto
2 = Off
Supply Fan Staged Speed Status 3 = Low
4 = Medium
5 = High
false = Off
Supply Fan Status
true = On
false = Disable
Supply Fan Switch Local Control
true = Enable
false = No Flow
System Chilled Water Flow
true = Flow
false = None
System Chilled Water Flow Lost
true = Failure
BAS-SVX31U-EN 201

false = No
System Chilled Water Flow Sensor Exists
true = Yes
false = Disabled
System Chilled Water Pump Request
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
System Chilled Water Request Failures Enabled
true = Enabled
false = None
System Chilled Water Return Sensor Failure
true = Failure
false = None
System Chilled Water Supply Sensor Failure
true = Failure
false = Stand Alone Control

System Control Command
true = BAS Control
false = Stand Alone Control

System Control Status
true = BAS Control
false = None
System Failure Exists
true = Failure
1 = Off
2 = Ambient Lockout
3 = Shutdown in Progress
4 = Softstart
System Mode 5 = Normal
6 = Rapid Power Failure Recovery
Note: This enumeration is only valid for the Chiller Plant Control
system point.
1 = Off
2 = Air Handler Startup Delay
3 = On
System Mode 4 = Common Space VAV Shutdown Delay
5 = Unknown
Note: This enumeration is only valid for the VAS system point.
false = Disabled
Tenant Override Function
true = Enabled
false = Inactive
Timed Override Active
true = Active
1 = 0 Hour
2 = 1 Hour
3 = 2 Hours
4 = 3 Hours
5 = 4 Hours
6 = 5 Hours
Timed Override Duration Setpoint 7 = 6 Hours
8 = 7 Hours
9 = 8 Hours
10 = 9 Hours
11 = 10 Hours
12 = 11 Hours
13 = 12 Hours
false = Disabled
Timed Override Function
true = Enabled
false = Inactive
Timed Override in Control
true = Active
1 = Auto
Timed Override Option Input 2 = Timed Override Request
3 = Timed Override Cancel
1 = Idle
Timed Override Status 2 = On
3 = Cancel
202 BAS-SVX31U-EN

false = Normal
Tower 1 Fan 1 Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
Tower 1 Fan 1 Flow Status
true = Flow
false = Off
Tower 1 Fan 1 Low Speed Start Stop Output
true = On
false = Normal
Tower 1 Fan 1 Reset BAS
true = Reset
false = Off
Tower 1 Fan 1 Start Stop Output
true = On
false = Normal
Tower 1 Fan 1 VFD Fault Status
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Close
Tower 1 Isolation Valve Output
true = Open
false = Close
Tower 1 Isolation Valve Status
true = Open
false = Off
Tower 1 Request BAS
true = On
false = Off
Tower 1 Request Local
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = Reset
BAS-SVX31U-EN 203

false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Close
true = Open
false = Closed
true = Open
false = Off
Tower 2 Request BAS
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = No Flow
true = Flow
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = Reset
false = Off
true = On
false = Normal
true = In Alarm
false = Close
true = Open
false = Closed
true = Open
false = Off
Tower 3 Request BAS
true = On
false = Off
true = On
false = Off
Tower Low Water Level Status
true = On
false = Off
Tower Makeup Water System Status
true = On
false = Off
Tower Sump Water Heater Status
true = On
204 BAS-SVX31U-EN

1 = 1 Heat/1 Cool
2 = Heat Pump
3 = Blower Coil
4 = Unit Ventilator
5 = Fan Coil
Trane Unit Type 6 = Rooftop
7 = Air Handler
8 = Vertical Self Contained
9 = Unitary
10 = VAV Box
11 = Fan Coil
false = Disabled
Unload at Start
true = Enabled
false = Inactive
Unload Request
true = Active
false = Disabled
Unoccupied Dehumidify Function
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling Function
true = Enabled
false = Disabled
Unoccupied Humidify Function
true = Enabled
false = Auto
VAV Drive Maximum Status
true = Open
false = Inactive
Ventilation Optimization Function
true = Active
1 = Active
2 = Disabled
3 = No VAV Data
Ventilation Optimization Status
4 = Air Handler Not Occupied
5 = No Qualified VAVs
6 = Unknown
false = Off
Water Pump Request
true = On
1 = Off
2 = Not Valid
3 = Not Valid
Water Valve Override
4 = Not Valid
5 = Open
6 = Close
BAS-SVX31U-EN 205

1 = Suspended
2 = No Chillers Available
3 = Normal Add Input In Fault Add Delay Timer Active
4 = Normal Add Input In Fault Add Delay Timer Not Active
5 = Normal Add Delay Timer Active
When Will A Chiller Be Added? 6 = Normal Add Delay Timer Not Active
7 = Soft Start Add Input In Fault Add Delay Timer Active
8 = Soft Start Add Input In Fault Add Delay Timer Not Active
9 = Soft Start Add Delay Timer Active
10 = Soft Start Add Delay Timer Not Active
11 = Rapid Power Fail Recovery
1 = Suspended
2 = No Chillers Available
3 = On Temp Subtract Input In Fault Subtract Delay Timer Active
4 = On Temp Subtract Input In Fault Subtract Delay Timer Not Active
5 = On Temp Subtract Delay Timer Active
6 = On Temp Subtract Delay Timer Not Active
7 = On Flow Subtract Input In Fault Subtract Delay Timer Active
When Will A Chiller Be Subtracted?
8 = On Flow Subtract Input In Fault Subtract Delay Timer Not Active
9 = On Flow Subtract Delay Timer Active
10 = On Flow Subtract Delay Timer Not Active
11 = On RLA Subtract Input In Fault Subtract Delay Timer Active
12 = On RLA Subtract Input In Fault Subtract Delay Timer Not Active
13 = On RLA Subtract Delay Timer Active
14 = On RLA Subtract Delay Timer Not Active
206 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Configuring TCP/IP and BACnet Settings
Configuration for TCP/IP and BACnet settings is located in the Identification and Communications
section on the Tracer® SC Installation page.
The following instructions provide example configuration settings when both the Tracer SC-App
and the Tracer SC-Base both reside on the same subnet and a BBMD is not required.
Tracer SC-App and Tracer SC-Base Reside on the Same Subnet

Configure the Tracer SC-App
1. Log on to the Tracer SC-App controller.
2. Navigate to the Identification and Communications section on the Tracer SC Installation page.
3. Click the I P C o n f i g u r a t i o n tab and then click E d i t .
4. Click U s e t h e F o l l o w i n g A d d r e s s radio button and enter the following:
• IP address — 192.168.1.10
• Subnet Mask — 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway — 192.168.1.254
5. Click S a v e . An error message appears stating that your PC will restart. Click O K .
6. Return to the Identification and Communications page. Click the B A C n e t C o n f i g u r a t i o n tab,
and then click E d i t .
7. Enter the following:
• Rotary Switch Setting — 1
• Device ID — 10000
• BACnet Network Number for Ethernet Port 1 — 1
• UDP Port for BACnet IP using Ethernet Network Port 1— 55110
• This Tracer SC is a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) — No
• BACnet Network Number for MS/TP Port 1 — 11
• Baud Rate for MS/TP Port 1 - 76800 bps
• Baud Rate for MS/TP Port 2 — 76800 bps
8. Click S a v e
Configure the Tracer SC-Base

1. Log on to the Tracer SC-Base controller.
3. Click the IP Configuration tab and then click E d i t .
• IP address — 192.168.1.20
• Subnet Mask — 255.255.255.0
5. Click S a v e . An error message appears stating that your PC will restart. Click OK.
6. Return to the I d e n t i f i c a t i o n a n d C o m m u n i c a t i o n s page. Click the B A C n e t C o n f i g u r a t i o n
tab and then click E d i t .
BAS-SVX31U-EN 207
• This Tracer SC is a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) — No

• Baud Rate for MS/TP Port 1 —76800 bps
• BACnet Network Number forMS/TP Port 2 — 22
8. Click S a v e .
Tracer SC-App and Tracer SC-Base Reside on Separate Subnets

The following instructions provide example configuration settings when both the Tracer-App and
the Tracer SC-Base both reside on separate subnets and a BBMD is required for both.
Configure the Tracer SC-App

2. Navigate to the I d e n t i f i c a t i o n a n d C o m m u n i c a t i o n s section on the Tracer SC Installation
page.
• Click U s e t h e F o l l o w i n g A d d r e s s radio button and enter the following:
• IP address — 192.168.1.10
• Subnet Mask — 255.255.255.0
• Default Gateway — 192.168.1.254
6. Return to the Identification and Communications page. Click the B A C n e t C o n f i g u r a t i o n tab,
then click E d i t .
• Rotary Switch Setting —1
• BACnet Network Number for Ethernet Port 1—1
• This Tracer SC is a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) — Yes
• BACnet Network Number for MS/TP Port 1—11
• Baud Rate for MS/TP Port 1— 76800 bps
• BACnet Network Number for MS/TP Port 2 —12
• Baud Rate for MS/TP Port 2 —76800 bps
Configure the Tracer SC-Base

1. Log on to the Tracer SC-Base controller.
• IP address — 192.168.1.20
• Subnet Mask — 255.255.255.0
6. Return to the Identification and Communications page. Click the B A C n e t C o n f i g u r a t i o n tab
and then click E d i t .
208 BAS-SVX31U-EN

• UDP Port for BACnet IP using Ethernet Network Port 1 — 46410
• This Tracer SC is a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) — Yes
• Baud Rate for MS/TP Port 1 - 76800 bps
8. Click S a v e .
9. Set up a BDT table.
Setting Up the BDT Table

A broadcast distribution table (BDT) contains BACnet IP broadcast management devices
(BBMDs). BDTs are required for a Tracer SC-App and Tracer SC-Base controllers when both
reside on separate subnets.
2. Navigate to the D e f i n e N e t w o r k section on the Tracer SC Installation page and then click
BDT Setup.
The BDT Setup page displays which contains a list of BBMDs for the Tracer SC-App.
3. Click S e t u p B D T .
4. Click a d d B B M D .
5. In the provided fields, enter the IP address of the Tracer SC-Base.
6. Click t e s t to verify communication.
7. Click s a v e a n d s e n d .
Repeat the above steps if using more than one Tracer SC-Base.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 209
Networking and IT Security
This section provides details on how Tracer® products interact with an IT network. For more
detailed information, refer to the Best Practices for IT Security Guide, (BAS-SVU035).
Network
HTTP and HTTPS Ports
Tracer SC and Tracer ES use HTTP and HTTPS to exchange data between a Web client and
server. The facility network administrator must open these ports to enable access to the BAS
from an external network location.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

SNMP is not supported by Tracer SC or Tracer ES. Internet protocol (IP) network configuration of
either system is performed with the user interface. Application administration privileges are
required to modify device network configuration.
Active Directory Services

Microsoft active directory services are not supported by either Tracer SC or Tracer ES. User
credentials are managed with the software application.
Domain Name Services (DNS)

Tracer SC and Tracer ES support outbound DNS functionality. With this capability it is easy to
configure the system to send alarm and event messages by e-mail to multiple users of the
system.
Network Bandwith Usage

A Trane BAS system requires very little network bandwidth because of the network architecture
design. For small to medium size facilities, only the Tracer SC resides on the building LAN. The
Tracer SC uses BACnet MS/TP or LonWorks FTT-10 protocols to communicate with equipment-
level controllers. Neither protocol is IP based.
• C o m m u n i c a t i o n a m o n g T r a c e r S C s i n a m u l t i - T r a c e r S C f a c i l i t y . This communication is
BACnet IP (UDP) based and the amount of traffic will vary depending on how the system is
configured. Generally, this communication will be infrequent and will utilize very small IP
packets.
• C o m m u n i c a t i o n b e t w e e n a n a c t i v e W e b c l i e n t a n d t h e T r a c e r S C W e b s e r v e r . The server
application Web pages and images are optimized for a Web environment and the transfer of a
Web page uses very little bandwidth.
• C o m m u n i c a t i o n b e t w e e n m u l t i p l e B A S s i t e s a n d T r a c e r E S . Tracer ES provides a Web
based user interface to manage multiple BAS sites. The bandwidth required for
communication is typical of other client/server applications.
IP Addressing and Network Address Translation (NAT) Routing

The BACnet protocol requires that all BACnet IP devices be assigned a static IP address. Because
of this requirement, BACnet systems do not support Network Address Translation. To enable
external communication with the system, the network firewall must be configured to accept
packets directed at the Tracer SC IP address.
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN)

Trane BAS systems may reside on VLAN networks. The same rules apply as stated in the IP
Addressing and NAT Routing section above.
210 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Security
Software
The Tracer SC customer interface requires a modern browser with no plug-ins (this includes
Internet Explorer, Chrome and Firefox). Some configuration pages require the Adobe Flash
Player and the Java SE Runtime Environment. These pages are currently transitioning to an
environment that does not utilize plug-ins.
Network Connectivity and SSL

Beginning with Tracer SC V4.1, customers can choose to enhance network security by limiting
user access over the IP network, restricting access through HTTPS only, and disallowing access
to port 8022 (Trane Diagnostic Access). The customer’s IT staff should be consulted when setting
up enhanced security.
Client Access and Password

Tracer SC and Tracer ES support individual user accounts and a role-based security access
system. Tracer SC emphasizes ease of use while protecting the BAS from inadvertent access by
unauthorized users. Trane strongly recommends the enforcement of optional complex password
requirements. Tracer SC administrators have the authority to require users to adhere to the
following when setting up a password:
• Password minimum length (must be at least 6 characters)
• Password requires mixed case
• Password requires a symbol
• Password cannot contain user information (cannot contain the user ID)
• Previous passwords blocked from reuse (valid range is 1 to 175)
• Password expiration
Network Ports
Incoming
• Port 80/443: TCP/HTTP(S) – Used for initial device setup and configuration and to provide
runtime status of the device.
• Port 47808: UDP – Used for BACnet IP communications. This port can be changed if dictated
by job requirements, or personal preference.
Outgoing
• Port 443: TCP /HTTPS – Used for sending data to Trane and to communicate control
messages to the Tracer SC.
• Port 1194: UDP/TLS – Used to provide high speed, secure access for the Trane Intelligent
Services Center (ISC) to service a building system.
• Port 47808: UDP – Used for BACnet IP communications. This port can be changed if dictated
by job requirements, or personal preference.
Firewalls
Trane systems do not have built in firewalls and rely on the network security infrastructure for
protection. Trane recommends that Tracer products be installed behind a firewall. For correct
operation behind a firewall, the following ports should be opened:
Incoming
If remote access to the web browser interface is required, Tracer SC supports the following
options:
• Internet routable (external) IP address of Tracer SC.
• VPN as defined in VPN Client access.
Outgoing
BAS-SVX31U-EN 211
If the existing network configuration allows outbound communications to the Internet, then no
additional work is required (standard configuration). If outbound ports are restricted, then ports
443 (HTTPS) and 1194 (UDP) must be opened for the assigned IP address of the Tracer SC.
VPN Client Access

A Virtual Private Network (VPN) can be used to allow a user to access the BAS from outside a
firewall. This is a typical configuration for remote access of a Tracer BAS system. You may need
to contact your administrator to request VPN access.
VPN LAN to LAN Access

Trane supports some LAN to LAN trusted network connections, but recommends the secure
tunneling methods built into Tracer SC. Contact Trane Product Support for inquiries regarding
LAN to LAN connections.
Cellular Routers
Cellular Routers can be connected directly to the Tracer SC as a convenient way to allow external
access to the BAS system prior to its connection to the building network. Permanent use of a
router may be an efficient way to isolate the BAS from the IT network. Monthly cost and BAS
performance should be considered prior to selecting this option. Trane has created a standard
solution, process, and support system for Trane offices to use when the preferred remote access
method cannot be achieved or the customers’s network is not available. For more information,
refer to the Tracer Cellular Router Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Guide, (BAS-
SVX067).
® Wireless
Air-Fi®
Trane BAS systems can be ordered with an Air-Fi® Wireless System instead of a wired fieldbus.
Air-Fi® is communicated over the Zigbee (IEEE 802.15.4) wireless protocol and can coexist with
other wireless protocols, including Wi-Fi. Trane Air-Fi® networks are secured so that only Trane
devices can operate with them. Although wireless access might extend beyond the site
perimeter, the Air-Fi® network uses authentication encryption to provide confidentiality and
integrity of the data.
Physical Security
The BACnet protocol is an open standard protocol. There are many vendor and publicly offered
software tools that, when connected to a network, can read and write data to any vendor's
BACnet system. This is a core benefit of the BACnet protocol. Physical access to devices and
networks should be controlled to a level appropriate for your facility. Physically mounting
devices in restricted access areas is a good best practice.
Special Considerations: Anti-virus Software

Trane does not support the installation of anti-virus software on Tracer SC, as it may interrupt its
intended operation. Services not in use have been turned off to mitigate susceptibility to viruses
and malicious software (malware).
212 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Notes
BAS-SVX31U-EN 213
Notes
214 BAS-SVX31U-EN
Notes
BAS-SVX31U-EN 215
Trane - by Trane Technologies (NYSE: TT), a global innovator - creates comfortable, energy efficient
indoor environments for commercial and residential applications. For more information, please visit
trane.com or tranetechnologies.com.
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvements and reserves the right to change design and specifications without
notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices.
BAS-SVX31U-EN 22 Apr 2021

Supersedes BAS-SVX31T-EN (April 2020) ©2021 Trane

Bas Svx31u en - 04222021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bas Svx31u en - 04222021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bas Svx31u en - 04222021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation, Operation, and Maintenance

Tracer® SC System Controller

April 2021 BAS-SVX31U-EN

Warnings, Cautions, and Notices

The three types of advisories are defined as follows:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property-damage only

Important Environmental Concerns

Important Responsible Refrigerant Practices

©2021 Trane BAS-SVX31U-EN

Software and Service Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

The Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Using the Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

User Accounts and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Variable Air Systems (VAS) Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

The Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Connecting a Tracer SC to a Building Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Single and Multiple Tracer SC Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

BACnet Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

The BACnet Unit Controller Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

The LonTalk Unit Controller Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Adding LonTalk Unit Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Interpreting the 7–Segment Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Setting Up the BDT Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Tracer SC Model Numbers

2 BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU LINK 1

3 BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU LINK 2

7 USB service tool port

8 USB host (future)

Ethernet network connection 2 (supports TCP/IP, recommended for direct connection to

11 EIA-232 serial connection

14 SD card port (future)

17 LonTalk service pin

18 LonTalk service LED

BACnet terminator 2 pack (a) X1365152401

Rover LonTalk interface adaptor(b) S3090062062

Tracer SC Service Parts

Figure 2. Tracer SC service parts

Table 1. Tracer SC model BMSC000AAA011000 (current)

1 Enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers (120 VAC, with outlet) X13651559010

2 Tracer SC module S3090058462

3 Power supply module X1365153801

(not shown) Transformer service part S3090062462

4 IMC power cable S3090059562

Large enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers, 120 VAC, with outlet

Large enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers, 120 VAC, with outlet

Table 1. Tracer SC model BMSC000AAA011000 (current) (continued)

Large enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers, 230 VAC, with outlet

Large enclosure for DIN-mounted controllers, 230

Table 2. Tracer SC models BMSC000AAA011100 and BMSC000AAA011200 (obsolete)

2 Tracer SC module S3090058462

3 Power supply module S3090058562

4 IMC power cable S3090059562

5 Cable assembly/modular terminal kit with U.S. outlet S3090059062

(not shown) Cable assembly/modular terminal kit S3090059162

6 Control panel cover (for models with U.S. outlet) S3090058962

(not shown) Control panel cover S3090058862